SHA852A
SHA851A
Spectrum Analyzer
User Manual
EN01C

SHA850A User Manual

Copyright and Declaration
Copyright
SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.

Trademark Information
SIGLENT is the registered trademark of SIGLENT TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Declaration⚫

SIGLENT products are protected by patent law in and outside of P.R.C.

⚫

SIGLENT reserves the right to modify or change parts of or all the specifications or pricing policies
at company’s sole decision.

⚫

Information in this publication replaces all previously corresponding material.

⚫

Any way of copying, extracting or translating the contents of this manual is not allowed without thepermission of SIGLENT.

Product Certification
SIGLENT guarantees this product conforms to the national and industrial stands in China and otherinternational stands conformance certification is in progress.

Contact Us
If you have any problem or requirement when using our products, please contact SIGLENTTECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD
Add : Blog No.4 & No.5, Antongda Industrial Zone, 3rd Liuxian Road, Bao’an District, Shenzhen,
518101, China
Tel : 400-878-0807
E-mail : sales@siglent.com
http://www.siglent.com

www.siglent.com

ISHA850A User Manual

General Safety Summary
Carefully read the following safety precautions to avoid any personal injury or damage the instrument
and avoid any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, please use the instrument as
specified.
Protection is impaired if used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer.

Precautions for Operation
Before operating this product, special training is required to ensure that the user is physically, mentallyand emotionally healthy and able to use the spectrum & network analyzer, otherwise it may cause
personal injury or material damage. Employers、operators are responsible for selecting suitablepersonnel to operate this product.
Before moving or transporting this product. Please read and observe the "Safety Transportation
Matters" chapter.
As with all industrial products, the use of substances that cause allergic reactions such as nickel
cannot generally be ruled out. If you experience an allergic reaction while using this product, please
consult a doctor in time to determine the cause.
Before you perform mechanical or heat treatment or disassemble the spectrum & network analyzer,
please be sure to read and pay special attention to the "Waste Disposal/Environmental Protection"
chapter.
In the event of a fire, this product may release harmful substances (gas, liquids, etc.), causing healthproblems. Therefore, appropriate measures must be taken, for example, protective masks andprotective clothing must be worn.

IIwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Safety Terms and Symbols
The meaning of symbols
symbolmeaningsymbolmeaning

Warning

Power Switch

Hazardous Voltage

Equipment meeting double
insulation or reinforced insulation

EarthGroundIndoor use only

Lithium battery failure

EU label for separately recycled
electrical and electronic equipment

Cue and its meaning
DANGER : Indicates direct injury or hazards that may happen.
WARNING : Indicates potential injury or hazards that may happen.
CAUTION : Indicates potential damage to the instrument or other property that may happen.
It must be consulted in all cases whereis marked, in order to find out the nature of the potential
HAZARDS and any actions which have to be taken to avoid them.

Cue et sa signification
DANGER : Indique des blessures directes ou des dangers qui peuvent survenir.
WARNING : indique des blessures ou des dangers potentiels pouvant survenir.
CAUTION : indique des dommages potentiels à l'instrument ou à d'autres biens pouvant survenir.
Il doit être consulté dans tous les cas où
est marqué, afin de connaître la nature des DANGERS
potentiels et les actions à entreprendre pour les éviter.

www.siglent.com

III

SHA850A User Manual

Safety Operation Matters
The product can only be operated under the safe conditions and positions specified by the
manufacturer. Do not obstruct the ventilation of the spectrum & network analyzer during use. Failure
to comply with the manufacturer's specifications may result in electric shock, fire, serious personal
injury, or even death. Applicable local safety regulations and accident prevention rules must be
observed in all applications.

When powered by a power adapter, it can only be used indoors.
Do not place the product on surface, vehicle, cabinet or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. When installing the product and fastening it to the article or structures,always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions. If the installation is not carried out inaccordance with the requirements of the document, it may cause personal injury or even death.
Do not use this product in or near a heat source, and the ambient temperature cannot exceed the
maximum temperature in the document or datasheet

Safety of Electricity
If you ignore the electrical safety methods, electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death
may occur.

Only use the power adapter and battery specified by the manufacturer to power the spectrum &network analyzer, and the power adapter can only work within its rated input voltage range.
Only the probe specified by the manufacturer can be used for testing. The use of non-manufacturer
probes for testing may result in electric shock accidents.
The user is not allowed to damage the insulation protection layer of the spectrum & network analyzer
and accessories. Doing so may cause electric shock. If an extension cord or terminal block is used for
power supply, it must be checked regularly to ensure safe use.
Before use, please check whether the power cord and probe are damaged. If the power cord andprobe are damaged, please do not continue to use the product.
Do not insert the AC plug of the power adapter into a dusty or dirty socket. Please make sure that theplug is firmly inserted into the socket, otherwise it may cause fire and/or injury due to sparks.
Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connectors. Doing so may cause fire or electric
shock.
When the measured voltage Vrms exceeds 30V, you should take appropriate measurement methods
to avoid any danger.
Unless expressly permitted, do not remove the cover or any part of the shell while the product is inoperation. Doing so will expose circuits and components, reduce the overvoltage level of themeasurement, and may cause personal injury, fire, or damage to the spectrum & network analyzer.

IVwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Anything that is not designed to be placed on the external interface of this product should not be
placed on the external interface, otherwise it will cause an internal short circuit and/or electric shock,fire or injury to the spectrum & network analyzer.
Do not place this product in an environment exceeding IP51, otherwise the spectrum & network
analyzer will be damaged.
This product must be used in a dry environment, otherwise it may cause electric shock.
It is forbidden to use this product when condensation has formed or may form inside or on the surfaceof this product. For example, when the spectrum & network analyzer moves from a cold environment
to a warm environment, the penetration of water increases the risk of electric shock.

Safety Transportation Matters
SIGLENT Technology provides handbags for the spectrum & network analyzer. For short-distancetransportation under supervision, please make sure that the spectrum & network analyzer is turned off
before putting it in the handbag. For long-distance transportation under unsupervised, please take out
the battery and put it in your handbag.
In order to facilitate the user to hold, SIGLENT Technology has installed a fabric handle on the
spectrum & network analyzer. This handle cannot be used as a focus point to be fixed ontransportation equipment, such as cranes, forklifts, trucks, etc. It is the user's responsibility to fasten
the product firmly to the transportation or lifting tool.
If you use this product in a vehicle, the driver is responsible for driving the vehicle safely and correctly.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any accidents or collisions. Do not use this product in amoving vehicle to avoid distracting the driver. Use this product appropriately in the vehicle to prevent
injury or other damage in the event of an accident.

Battery Usage
This product contains a rechargeable lithium battery pack. If misused, there is a risk of explosion, fireand / or serious personal injury, and even death in some cases.
The battery cannot be disassembled or crushed.
The battery or battery pack cannot be exposed to high temperature or fire, and it must be stored indirect sunlight. Keep the battery clean and dry. Use a dry, clean cloth to clean contaminatedconnectors.
The battery or battery pack cannot be short-circuited. Batteries or battery packs should not be stored
in an environment that can easily cause a short circuit, such as boxes and drawers containing metal
debris. The battery pack cannot be taken out of its original packaging before use.
Batteries and battery packs should not be exposed to any mechanical shock that exceeds theallowable level.
If the battery leaks, do not let the liquid contact the skin or eyes. If contact occurs, wash the contact

www.siglent.com

VSHA850A User Manualarea with plenty of water and seek medical assistance.
The power adapter specified by SIGLENT Technology must be used for charging, otherwise it may
cause a fire or cause personal injury or death.
It must be charged in a well-ventilated room. During the charging process, the spectrum & network
analyzer should not be covered by objects (such as blankets, towels, clothes), which will affect theheat dissipation effect and cause a serious fire.
Improper battery replacement may cause an explosion. For the reliability and safety of the spectrum &network analyzer, the battery model specified by SIGLENT Technology must be replaced.
Used batteries and battery packs must be recycled and separated from residual waste. Batteries
contain hazardous waste, and local regulations on waste disposal and recycling must be followed.

VIwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Waste Disposal
The used batteries in the product must not be disposed of together with unsorted municipal waste,they must be collected separately and placed in designated recycling points.
If the product and its components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a way beyond theintended use, hazardous substances may be released. Therefore, this product can only bedisassembled by professional personnel. Improper disassembly may endanger your health. The local
waste disposal regulations must be followed.

Safety ComplianceThis section lists the safety standards with which the product complies.

U.S. nationally recognized testing laboratory listing◼

UL 61010-1:2012/R:2018-11. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

◼

UL 61010-2-030:2018. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control,and Laboratory Use – Part2-030: Particular requirements for testing and measuring circuits.

Canadian certification◼

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1:2012/A1:2018-11. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment
for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements.

◼

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-2-030:2018. Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 2-030: Particular requirements for testing andmeasuring circuits.

www.siglent.com

VIISHA850A User Manual

General Care and Cleaning
Care
Do not store or leave the instrument in direct sunshine for extended periods of time.
To avoid damages to the instrument or probes, please do not expose them to fog, liquid, or solvents.

Cleaning
Please perform the following steps to clean the instrument and probes regularly in accordance with its
operating conditions.
Disconnect the instrument from all power sources and then clean with a soft wet cloth.
Clean the loose dust on the outside of the instrument and probe with a soft cloth. When cleaning the
LCD, take care to avoid scratching it.
To avoid damage to the surface of the instrument and probe, please do not use any corrosive liquid or
chemical cleansers.
Make sure that the instrument is completely dry before restarting it to avoid potential short circuits or
personal injury.

VIII

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Measurement Category
WARNING
Make sure that no measurement overvoltage reach the product, or else theoperator might expose to danger of electric shock.
Assurez-vous qu'aucune surtension de mesure n'atteigne le produit, sinon
l'opérateur pourrait s'exposer à un risque de choc électrique.
IEC61010-2-030 defines the measurement category to rate the ability of measuring instruments towithstand short-term transient overvoltage outside of the working voltage. This product and its
accessories can only be used in the environment of the nominal measurement category.
⚫

CAT Ⅰ:
0- An instrument with no rated measurement category is used to measure circuits that are notdirectly connected to the mains, such as a circuit board powered by a battery or a secondary
circuit with special protection.

⚫

CAT II:For measurements installed in buildings, such as junction boxes, circuit breakers, distribution
boards and equipment permanently connected to fixed installations.

⚫

CAT III:
Used for measurements installed in buildings, such as junction boxes, circuit breakers,
distribution boards and equipment that are permanently connected to fixed installations.

⚫

CAT IV:
It is used for measuring at the source of low-voltage devices, such as electricity meters andprimary overcurrent protection devices.

www.siglent.com

IX

SHA850A User Manual

Working Environment
General requirement
Environment
This product is intended for indoor use and should be operated in a clean, dry environment.
It can be stored in an environment with a waterproof/dustproof rating better than IP51.

Temperature
Operating: 0℃ to +50℃
Charging: 0℃ to +45℃
Non-operation: -20℃ to +70℃
Note: Direct sunlight, radiators, and other heat sources should be taken into account when assessing
the ambient temperature.

Humidity
Operating: 85% RH, 40℃, 24 hours
Non-operating: 85% RH, 65℃, 24 hours

AltitudeOperating: less than 2 km
Non-operation: less than 3 km

Installation (overvoltage) Category
This product is powered by mains conforming to installation (overvoltage) category II.

WARNING
Make sure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by thunderbolt) canreach the product, or else the operator might expose to danger of electric
shock.
Assurez-vous qu'aucune surtension (comme celle causée par la foudre) nepeut atteindre le produit, sinon l'opérateur pourrait s'exposer à un risque dechoc électrique.

Installation (overvoltage) Category Definitions

X

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Installation (overvoltage) category I refers to signal level which is applicable to equipment
measurement terminals connected to the source circuit. In these terminals, precautions are done tolimit the transient voltage to the corresponding low level.
Installation (overvoltage) category II refers to the local power distribution level which is applicable toequipment connected to the AC line (AC power).
Degree of Pollution
The spectrum & network analyzers may be operated in environments of Pollution Degree II.

Note: Degree of Pollution II refers to a working environment which is dry and non-conductive pollution
occurs. Occasional temporary conductivity caused by condensation is expected.

IP Rating
IP51 (as defined in IEC 60529).

Ventilation Requirement
Please make sure that the air intake and exhaust areas are free from obstructions and have free air.
When using the spectrum & network analyzer in a bench-top or rack setting, provide at least 10 cm
clearance beside, above and behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.

WARNING
Inadequate ventilation may cause temperature increase which would
damage the instrument. So please keep the instrument well ventilated
during operation.
Une ventilation inadéquate peut entraîner une augmentation de latempérature qui endommagerait l'instrument. Veuillez donc garderl'instrument bien ventilé pendant le fonctionnement.

www.siglent.com

XI

SHA850A User Manual

AC Power Requirement
The power adapter operates with a single-phase, 100 to 240 Vrms (+/-10%) AC power at 50/60 Hz(+/-5%).
No manual voltage selection is required because the instrument automatically adapts to line voltage.
Depending on the type and number of options and accessories (probes, PC port plug-in, chargingetc.), When powered by adapter, the analyzer can consume up to 25 W of power.

Note: The power adapter automatically adapts to the AC line input within the following ranges:

Voltage Range:

90 - 264 Vrms

Frequency Range:

47 - 63 Hz

Please use the power cord and adapter provided by the manufacturer. Use of other non-designatedproducts may cause personal injury.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard!
Use of an adapter or power supply not specified by the manufacturer may
cause personal injury.
Risque de choc électrique !
L'utilisation d'un adaptateur ou d'un bloc d'alimentation non spécifié par lefabricant peut entraîner des blessures.
To make the spectrum & network analyzer completely power off, unplug the instrument power cordfrom the AC socket and remove the battery from the analyzer.
The battery should be removed from the analyzer when it is not to be used for an extended period oftime.

Maintenance and Services
Only authorized and specially trained personnel can open the spectrum & network analyzer. Whenperforming maintenance operations on the spectrum & network analyzer, you must remove the power
adapter and make sure that the spectrum & network analyzer is turned off, otherwise it may cause aninternal short circuit of the spectrum & network analyzer.
Adjustment, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair can only be performed by operators
authorized by SIGLENT Technology. Safety-related parts can only be replaced with original parts.
Safety tests must be carried out after replacing part.

XII

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

L'information de sûreté
Résumé général de sûreté
Lisez soigneusement les mesures de sécurité suivantes pour éviter n'importe quelles blessures ou lesdommages à l'instrument et à tous les produits se sont reliés à eux. Pour éviter des risques, utilisez
svp l'instrument comme indiqué.

Employez la ligne à haute tension appropriée
Seulement le cordon de secteur conçu pour l'instrument et autorisé par le pays local a pu êtreemployé.

A rectifié l'instrument.
L'instrument est fondu par le conducteur protecteur de terra de la ligne à haute tension. Pour éviter ladécharge électrique, le conducteur moulu doit être relié à la terre. Assurez-vous que l'instrument est
fondu correctement avant de relier ses bornes d'entrée ou de rendement.

Reliez le fil de signal correctement.
Le potentiel de l'au sol de fil de signal est égal à la terre, ainsi ne relie pas le fil de signal à une
tension.

Regardez estimations au-dessus de toutes les bornes des'Pour éviter le feu ou la décharge électrique, regardez svp au-dessus de toutes les estimations etinstruction de signe de l'instrument. Avant de relier l'instrument, lisez svp le manuel soigneusement
pour obtenir plus d'informations sur les estimations.

Employez la protection appropriée de surtension
Assurez-vous qu'aucune surtension (comme cela provoqué par un orage) ne peut atteindre le produit,
ou bien l'opérateur pourrait exposer au danger du choc électrique.

Empêchement électrostatiqueFonctionnez dans un environnement protecteur de secteur de décharge électrostatique pour éviterdes dommages induits par décharge statique. A toujours rectifié les conducteurs internes et externes
du câble pour libérer la charge statique avant de se relier.

La ventilation insatisfaisante de ventilationwww.siglent.com

XIII

SHA850A User Manual

bonne de subsistance peut causer l'augmentation de la température, qui endommagera par la suite
l'instrument. Gardez ainsi la ventilation bonne et inspectez la prise et éventez régulièrement.

Évitez le circuit ou les composants exposésne touchent pas les contacts ou les composants exposés quand le courant passe.

Employez l'utilisation appropriéede fusible seulement le fusible indiqué.

Ne fonctionnez pas sans couverturesn'actionnent pas l'instrument des couvertures ou des panneaux étant coupés.

Ne fonctionnez pas avec des échecs suspectés.
Si vous suspectez les dommages se produisent à l'instrument, l'ont inspecté par le personnel deservice qualifié avant d'autres opérations. N'importe quel entretien, ajustement ou remplacement
particulièrement aux circuits ou aux accessoires doivent être exécutés par le personnel autorisé par
SIGLENT.

Ne fonctionnez pas en conditions humides.
Afin d'éviter de court-circuiter à l'intérieur du dispositif ou de la décharge électrique, svp nefonctionnez pas dans un environnement humide.

Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Ne fonctionnez pas dans une atmosphère explosive.
Afin d'éviter d'endommager le dispositif ou les blessures, il est important d'utiliser le dispositif loin àpartir d'une atmosphère explosive.

Maintenez les surfaces de produit propres et sèches.
Pour éviter l'influence de la poussière et/ou de l'humidité en air, maintenez svp la surface du dispositif
propre et sèche.

En manipulant la sûreté
manipulez svp avec soin pendant le transport pour éviter d'endommager des boutons, des interfaces
de bouton et d'autres parties sur les panneaux.

XIV

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Le corps ou l'opérateur responsable devrait se référer au manuel d'instruction pour préserver laprotection se permettent par l'équipement. Si l'équipement est utilisé en quelque sorte non indiqué parle fabricant, la protection fournie par l'équipement peut être altérée.

On ne permet à aucune pièce du dispositif et de ses accessoires d'être changé ou remplacé, autre
qu'autorisé par le fabricant ou son agent.
Pas placez l'équipement de sorte qu'il soit difficile d'utiliser le dispositif débranchant (prisedétachable).

Limites et symboles de sûreté
Limites en ce manuel. Ces limites peuvent apparaître en ce manuel :Les rapportsd'avertissement D'AVERTISSEMENT indiquent les conditions ou lespratiques qui pourraient avoir comme conséquence les dommages ou laperte de la ie.

Les rapports
d'attention d'ATTENTION indiquent les conditions ou les pratiques qui
pourraient avoir comme consequenceles dommages à ce produit ou à
toute autre propriété.

Limites sur le produit. Ces limites peuvent apparaître sur le produit :Le DANGER indique les dommages ou les risques directs qui peuvent se produire.
Dommages ou risques potentiels de WARNINGIndicates qui peuvent se produire.

L'ATTENTION indique des dommages potentiels à l'instrument ou à toute autre propriété qui peuvent
se produire.

Si la trouvaille de tels symboles sur le produit, consultent le manuel pour découvrir la nature du risqueet des actions qui doivent être pris.

www.siglent.com

XV

SHA850A User Manual

Symboles sur le produit. Ces symboles peuvent apparaître sur le produit :DangereuxProtecteur

TensionAu sol de la terre

Avertissement

ChâssisPuissance

GroundSwitchCatégorie de mesure
Les analyzers peuvent faire des mesures dans d'autres circuits qui ne sont pas directement reliés aux
forces. Pour ne pas employer le produit pour des mesures dans d'autres catégories de mesure, telles
que le CAT II, CAT III, CAT IV.
Ne pas utiliser l'équipement pour des mesures sur des forces circuite, pour ne pas utiliserl'équipement pour des mesures sur la tension excèdent la gamme de tension décrivent dans lemanuel.

Les rapports
cet analyzers peut seulement être employé pour des mesures dansses catégories indiquées de mesure.

La catégorie II de mesurede définitions de catégorie de mesure est pour des mesures effectuées sur des circuits directement
reliés à l'installation de basse tension. Les exemples sont des mesures sur des appareilsélectroménagers, des outils portatifs et l'équipement semblable.

La catégorie III de mesure est pour des mesures effectuées dans l'installation de bâtiment. Les
exemples sont des mesures sur des conseils de distribution, des disjoncteurs, le câblage, y compris
des câbles, des barres omnibus, des boîtes de jonction, des commutateurs, des douille-sorties dansl'installation fixe, et l'équipement à l'utilisation industrielle et à un autre équipement,

par exemple. Moteurs stationnaires avec le raccordement permanent à l'installation fixe.
XVI

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

La catégorie IV de mesure est pour des mesures effectuées à la source d'installation de basse
tension.Les exemples sont des mètres et des mesures de l'électricité sur les dispositifs de protection
d'excédent primaire et les unités de commande courants d'ondulation.

Environnement de fonctionnement
Température
En fonctionnement: 0 à + 40
Non-fonctionnement: -20 à + 60

Humidité
Moins de + 35: humidité relative ≤85%
+ 35 à + 40 ℃: humidité relative ≤85%

EN AVERTISSANT
d'éviter le court-circuit à l'intérieur de l'instrument ou de la décharge électrique, svp nefonctionnez pas dans l'environnement humide.

Opérationd'altitude : moins de 2 kilomètres
de non-fonctionnement : moins de 3 kilomètres

Degré de protection
IP51.

La catégorie d'installation (surtension)ce produit est actionnée par des forces conformément à la catégorie II. d'installation (surtension).

EN AVERTISSANT
assurez-vous qu'aucune surtension (comme cela provoqué par coup de
foudre) ne peut atteindre le produit, ou bien l'opérateur pourrait
exposer au danger de la décharge électrique.

www.siglent.com

XVII

SHA850A User Manual

La catégorie II d'installation de définitions de catégorie d'installation (surtension) (surtension) se
rapporte au niveau local de distribution d'énergie qui est applicable à l'équipement relié à la ligne à
C.A. (courant alternatif).

Condition de ventilation
This analyzer uses fan to force cooling. Please make sure that the air intake and exhaust areas arefree from obstructions and have free air. When using the analyzer in a bench-top or rack setting,provide at least 10 cm clearance beside, above and behind the instrument for adequate ventilation.

Cet analyzer utilise le ventilateur pour forcer le refroidissement. Veuillez s'assurer que les secteurs
d'entrée et d'échappement d'air sont exempts des obstructions et ont l'air libre. À l'aide de l'analyzer
dans un mettre hors jeu-dessus ou un arrangement de support, fournissez au moins le dégagement
de 10 centimètres près, au-dessus et derrière de l'instrument pour à ventilation proportionnée.

La ventilation insatisfaisante peut causer l'augmentation de la température qui
endommagerait l'instrument. Veuillez ainsi la subsistance l'instrument bien aéré lors dufonctionnement et inspectez la prise et éventez régulièrement.

Soin général et nettoyage
Ne stockez pas ou ne laissez pas l'instrument en soleil direct pendant de longues périodes.

Pour éviter d'endommager l'instrument, svp ne les laissez pas dans le brouillard, le liquide,
ou le dissolvant.

nettoyage
Veuillez exécuter les étapes suivantes pour nettoyer l'instrument régulièrement selon ses conditions
de fonctionnement.

1. Démontez l'instrument de toutes les sources d'énergie, et puis nettoyez-le avec un tissu humide
mou.

XVIII

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

2. Nettoyez la poussière lâche sur l'extérieur de l'instrument avec un tissu mou. En nettoyant
l'affichage à cristaux liquides, salut pour éviter de le scarifier.

Pour éviter d'endommager la surface de l'instrument, svp n'utilisez aucune épierreusecorrosive de liquide ou de produit chimique.

Assurez-vous que l'instrument est complètement sec avant de le remettre en marche pouréviter des courts-circuits ou des blessures.

www.siglent.com

XIX

SHA850A User Manual

Allgemeine Sicherheitshinweise
Um Verletzungen oder Schäden am Gerät und den damit verbundenen Produkten zu vermeiden,
lesen Sie die folgenden Sicherheitshinweise sorgfältig durch.
Um mögliche Gefahren zu vermeiden, verwenden Sie bitte das Gerät wie angegeben.
Wartungsarbeiten an diesem Gerät dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Reparaturpersonal
durchgeführt werden.

Verwendung eines geeigneten Netzkabels

Verwenden Sie nur das für das Gerät vorgesehene und von den örtlichen Behörden zugelassene
Netzkabel.
Erdung des Gerätes

Das Gerät ist über den Schutzleiter des Netzkabels geerdet. Um einen elektrischen Schlag zu
vermeiden, vergewissern Sie sich bitte, bevor Sie seine Eingangs- oder Ausgangsklemmenanschließen, dass das Gerät korrekt geerdet ist.
Anschluss der Signalleitung

Die Masse der Signalleitung ist auf dem gleichen Potential wie die Erdung des Gerätes.
Schließen Sie daher die Masseleitung nie an eine Hochspannung an. Berühren Sie keine
freiliegenden Kontakte oder Komponenten.
Verschaffen Sie sich einen Überblick über alle Anschluss-Ratings

Um Brände oder Stromschläge zu vermeiden, lesen Sie bitte alle Bemerkungen und
Anweisungen des Gerätes. Bevor Sie das Gerät anschließen, lesen Sie bitte das Handbuch
sorgfältig durch, um weitere Informationen über die Nennleistungen zu erhalten.
Betreiben Sie kein Gerät, bei dem der Verdacht besteht, dass es defekt ist.

Wenn Sie vermuten, dass das Produkt beschädigt ist, lassen Sie es bitte von qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal überprüfen. Vermeiden Sie den Kontakt mit freiliegenden Stromkreisen oder
Drähten. Berühren Sie keine freiliegenden Kontakte oder Komponenten, wenn das Gerät
eingeschaltet ist.
Verwenden Sie einen geeigneten Überspannungsschutz

Stellen Sie sicher, dass keine Überspannung (z.B. durch ein Gewitter) auf das Produkt gelangenkann, da sonst der Bediener der Gefahr eines Stromschlags ausgesetzt sein kann.
Nicht ohne Abdeckungen betreiben

Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht bei abgenommenen Abdeckungen oder Platten.
Halten Sie die Oberfläche des Gerätes sauber und trocken.
Nicht unter nassen/feuchten Bedingungen betreiben.
Betreiben Sie das Gerät nicht in einer explosiven Atmosphäre.
Vermeiden Sie es, dieses Gerät einem Feuer auszusetzen.

XXwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Sicherheitshinweise und Symbole
In diesem Produkt verwendete Begriffe. Diese Begriffe können im Produkt erscheinen:
GEFAHRweist auf eine mögliche, sofortige und direkte Verletzung oder Gefährdung hin.

WARNUNGweist auf möglicherweise auftretende Verletzungen oder Gefahren hin

VORSICHT

weist auf möglicherweise auftretende Schäden am Gerät oder anderen
Gegenständen
hin

In diesem Produkt verwendete Symbole. Diese Symbole können auf dem Produkt erscheinen:

Gefährliche
Spannung

www.siglent.com

Schutzerde

Sicherheitswarnung

ErdungNetzschalter

XXISHA850A User Manual

CONTENTSCOPYRIGHT AND DECLARATION ............................................................................................. I
GENERAL SAFETY SUMMARY ................................................................................................. II
PRECAUTIONS FOR OPERATION................................................................................................... II
SAFETY TERMS AND SYMBOLS ................................................................................................... III
SAFETY OPERATION MATTERS ................................................................................................... IV
SAFETY OF ELECTRICITY ............................................................................................................ IV
SAFETY TRANSPORTATION MATTERS .......................................................................................... V
BATTERY USAGE ........................................................................................................................ V
WASTE DISPOSAL ..................................................................................................................... VII
SAFETY COMPLIANCE ............................................................................................................... VII
GENERAL CARE AND CLEANING ......................................................................................... VIII
MEASUREMENT CATEGORY................................................................................................... IX
WORKING ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................ X
GENERAL REQUIREMENT ............................................................................................................. X
VENTILATION REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................... XIAC POWER REQUIREMENT........................................................................................................ XII
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICES............................................................................................. XII
L'INFORMATION DE SÛRETÉ ................................................................................................ XIIIRÉSUMÉ GÉNÉRAL DE SÛRETÉ ................................................................................................. XIII
LIMITES ET SYMBOLES DE SÛRETÉ ............................................................................................ XVCATÉGORIE DE MESURE .......................................................................................................... XVIENVIRONNEMENT DE FONCTIONNEMENT ................................................................................. XVIICONDITION DE VENTILATION .................................................................................................. XVIII
SOIN GÉNÉRAL ET NETTOYAGE .............................................................................................. XVIII
ALLGEMEINE SICHERHEITSHINWEISE ............................................................................... XX
SICHERHEITSHINWEISE UND SYMBOLE..................................................................................... XXICONTENTS ............................................................................................................................. XXII
1QUICK START .................................................................................................................. 1
1.1

GENERAL INSPECTION .................................................................................................. 1

1.2

PREPARING FOR USE ................................................................................................... 2

1.2.1

XXII

Appearance and Dimension ................................................................................... 2

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

1.2.2Power Supply Information ...................................................................................... 3

1.3

FRONT PANEL .............................................................................................................. 4

1.4

REAR PANEL ................................................................................................................ 7

1.5

USER INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 10

1.6

TOUCH SCREEN AND MOUSE OPERATION ..................................................................... 11

1.7

FIRMWARE OPERATION .............................................................................................. 12

1.7.1

Check System Information ................................................................................... 12

1.7.2

Load Option .......................................................................................................... 12

1.7.3

Firmware Upgrade ................................................................................................ 12

1.8

COMMUNICATION AND REMOTE CONTROL ................................................................... 12

1.9

SERVICE AND SUPPORT.............................................................................................. 13

1.10

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................... 13

2

MODE & MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................. 16

3

SPECTRUM ANALYZER MODE.................................................................................... 19
3.1

FREQUENCY & SPAN .................................................................................................. 19

3.1.1

Frequency & Span ................................................................................................ 19

3.1.2

X Axis Scale.......................................................................................................... 21

3.1.3

Freq Offset ............................................................................................................ 21

3.1.4

Freq Step .............................................................................................................. 21

3.1.5

Auto Tune ............................................................................................................. 22

3.2

BW ............................................................................................................................ 22

3.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth ........................................................................................... 22

3.2.2

Video Bandwidth................................................................................................... 23

3.2.3

V/R Ratio .............................................................................................................. 24

3.3

SWEEP ...................................................................................................................... 25

3.3.1

Sweep Points ........................................................................................................ 25

3.3.2

Sweep Time & Sweep Time Rules ....................................................................... 25

3.3.3

Sweep Time Estimate........................................................................................... 26

3.3.4

Sweep/Measure.................................................................................................... 27

3.4

AMPLITUDE ................................................................................................................ 27

3.4.1

Ref Level............................................................................................................... 27

3.4.2

Attenuator ............................................................................................................. 28

3.4.3

RF Preamp ........................................................................................................... 29

www.siglent.com

XXIII

SHA850A User Manual

3.4.4

Ref Offset.............................................................................................................. 29

3.4.5

Y Axis Scale.......................................................................................................... 29

3.4.6

Correction ............................................................................................................. 32

3.5

TRIGGER .................................................................................................................... 37

3.5.1

Trigger Source ...................................................................................................... 37

3.5.2

Trigger Level ......................................................................................................... 37

3.5.3

Trigger Slope ........................................................................................................ 38

3.5.4

Trigger Delay ........................................................................................................ 38

3.5.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only) .......................... 39

3.5.6

Period (periodic trigger only) ................................................................................ 39

3.5.7

Offset Time ........................................................................................................... 40

3.5.8

Reset Time Offset Display.................................................................................... 40

3.5.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only) ...................................................................... 40

3.5.10Gate Source.......................................................................................................... 41

3.5.11Gate ...................................................................................................................... 41

3.6

TRACE ....................................................................................................................... 45

3.6.1

Select Trace.......................................................................................................... 45

3.6.2

Trace Type............................................................................................................ 46

3.6.3

Trace State ........................................................................................................... 46

3.6.4

Detect ................................................................................................................... 47

3.6.5

Math ...................................................................................................................... 48

3.6.6

Normalize.............................................................................................................. 50

3.6.7

Trace Function ...................................................................................................... 51

3.7

MARKER & PEAK ........................................................................................................ 51

3.7.1

Select Marker ....................................................................................................... 52

3.7.2

Select Trace.......................................................................................................... 52

3.7.3

Marker Type.......................................................................................................... 52

3.7.4

Marker Postion ..................................................................................................... 54

3.7.5

Relative To............................................................................................................ 55

3.7.6

Readout Type ....................................................................................................... 55

3.7.7

Marker Couple ...................................................................................................... 56

3.7.8

Marker Lines ......................................................................................................... 56

3.7.9

Marker Table......................................................................................................... 57

XXIV

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.7.10Marker -> .............................................................................................................. 57

3.7.11Marker Fn ............................................................................................................. 59

3.7.12

Peak Search ......................................................................................................... 62

3.8

LIMIT .......................................................................................................................... 66

3.8.1

Limit State ............................................................................................................. 66

3.8.2

Limit Margin .......................................................................................................... 66

3.8.3

Limit Type ............................................................................................................. 67

3.8.4

Limit Edit ............................................................................................................... 67

3.8.5

Limit Test .............................................................................................................. 70

3.8.6

Setup .................................................................................................................... 71

3.9

MEAS & MEAS SETUP................................................................................................. 71

3.9.1

Swept SA .............................................................................................................. 72

3.9.2

Channel Power ..................................................................................................... 77

3.9.3

ACPR .................................................................................................................... 79

3.9.4

OBW ..................................................................................................................... 82

3.9.5

T-Power ................................................................................................................ 85

3.9.6

TOI ........................................................................................................................ 87

3.9.7

Spectrum Monitor ................................................................................................. 88

3.9.8

CNR ...................................................................................................................... 90

3.9.9

Harmonics............................................................................................................. 92

3.9.10

IQ Acquisition ....................................................................................................... 94

4

CABLE AND ANTENNA MODE..................................................................................... 97
4.1

MEAS SETTINGS ......................................................................................................... 97

4.1.1

Distance to Fault Measurement ........................................................................... 97

4.1.2

Return Loss Measurements ................................................................................. 99

4.1.3

1-Port Cable Loss Measurements ........................................................................ 99

4.1.4

2-Port Insertion Loss Measurement ..................................................................... 99

4.1.5

Time Domain Reflection Measurement .............................................................. 100

4.1.6

Output Power ...................................................................................................... 103

4.2

FREQ/DIST ............................................................................................................... 104

4.3

AMPLITUDE .............................................................................................................. 105

4.3.1

Scale/Reference level and Position ................................................................... 105

4.3.2

Automatic Scaling ............................................................................................... 106

www.siglent.com

XXVSHA850A User Manual

4.4

SWEEP .................................................................................................................... 106

4.4.1

Points .................................................................................................................. 106

4.4.2

Sweep Time ........................................................................................................ 106

4.4.3

Sweep/Measure.................................................................................................. 107

4.5

AVERAGING.............................................................................................................. 108

4.6

TRACE ..................................................................................................................... 108

4.6.1

Select Trace........................................................................................................ 108

4.6.2

Display Trace ...................................................................................................... 109

4.6.3

Math .................................................................................................................... 109

4.7

MARKER & PEAK ...................................................................................................... 110

4.7.1

Marker Settings .................................................................................................. 110

4.7.2

Peak Search ....................................................................................................... 113

4.7.3

Continue Peak/Valley ......................................................................................... 113

4.8

LIMIT ........................................................................................................................ 114

4.8.1

Limit Edit ............................................................................................................. 114

4.8.2

Limit Test ............................................................................................................ 117

4.9

CALIBRATION ........................................................................................................... 118

4.9.1

Definitions ........................................................................................................... 118

4.9.2

Calibration Kit ..................................................................................................... 119

4.9.3

Calibration Type ................................................................................................. 120

4.9.4

Ecal ..................................................................................................................... 123

5

VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER MODE ................................................................... 125
5.1

MEAS SETTING......................................................................................................... 125

5.1.1

Meas Type .......................................................................................................... 125

5.1.2

Format ................................................................................................................ 125

5.1.3

Output power ...................................................................................................... 127

5.1.4

Port extention ..................................................................................................... 128

5.2

FREQUENCE RANGE ................................................................................................. 129

5.3

BW .......................................................................................................................... 130

5.4

SWEEP .................................................................................................................... 131

5.4.1

Points .................................................................................................................. 131

5.4.2

Sweep Time &Sweep Time Rules ...................................................................... 131

5.4.3

Sweep/Measure.................................................................................................. 131

XXVI

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.5

AMPLITUDE .............................................................................................................. 132

5.5.1

RF Atten.............................................................................................................. 132

5.5.2

Y Axis.................................................................................................................. 132

5.5.3

Auto Scaling........................................................................................................ 133

5.6

TRACE ..................................................................................................................... 134

5.6.1

Num of Traces .................................................................................................... 134

5.6.2

Select Trace........................................................................................................ 134

5.6.3

Memory Trace .................................................................................................... 135

5.6.4

Hold Trace .......................................................................................................... 136

5.7

MARKER & PEAK ...................................................................................................... 137

5.7.1

Marker Settings .................................................................................................. 137

5.7.2

Marker Function.................................................................................................. 139

5.7.3

Peak .................................................................................................................... 142

5.8

LIMIT ........................................................................................................................ 143

5.8.1

Limit Edit ............................................................................................................. 143

5.8.2

Limit Test ............................................................................................................ 146

5.9

CAIBRATION ............................................................................................................. 147

5.9.1

Definitions ........................................................................................................... 147

5.9.2

Calibration Kit ..................................................................................................... 148

5.9.3

Calibration Type ................................................................................................. 149

5.9.4

Ecal ..................................................................................................................... 152

6

MODULATION ANALYZER MODE ............................................................................. 154
6.1

DIGITAL MODULATION ANALYSIS (DMA) ................................................................... 154

6.1.1

Settings ............................................................................................................... 154

6.1.2

Demod ................................................................................................................ 155

6.1.3

Filter .................................................................................................................... 158

6.1.4

Burst/sync Search .............................................................................................. 159

6.1.5

BERT .................................................................................................................. 162

6.2

ANALOG MODULATION ANALYSIS (AMA) ................................................................... 163

6.2.1

Demod Type ....................................................................................................... 163

6.2.2

IFBW ................................................................................................................... 164

6.2.3

EqLPF ................................................................................................................. 164

6.2.4

Average .............................................................................................................. 164

www.siglent.com

XXVII

SHA850A User Manual

6.3

FREQ ....................................................................................................................... 165

6.3.1

Freq & Span........................................................................................................ 165

6.3.2

CF Step............................................................................................................... 165

6.4

BW .......................................................................................................................... 166

6.4.1

EQBW ................................................................................................................. 166

6.4.2

Window ............................................................................................................... 166

6.5
6.5.1
6.6

SWEEP .................................................................................................................... 167
Measure/Sweep Control (Single/Continue/Restart) ........................................... 167
TRIGGER .................................................................................................................. 168

6.6.1

Trigger Source .................................................................................................... 168

6.6.2

Trigger Level ....................................................................................................... 168

6.6.3

Trigger Slope ...................................................................................................... 169

6.6.4

Trigger Delay ...................................................................................................... 169

6.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (External Trigger ) ............................. 170

6.6.6

Period(Period) .................................................................................................... 170

6.6.7

Offset Time(Period) ............................................................................................ 170

6.6.8

Reset Offset Display(Period) .............................................................................. 170

6.6.9

Sync Source(Period) .......................................................................................... 171

6.6.10Auto Trigger ........................................................................................................ 171

6.6.11

Hold Off............................................................................................................... 172

6.7

AMPT ....................................................................................................................... 173

6.7.1

Attenuator & RF Preamp .................................................................................... 173

6.7.2

Ref Level & Scale ............................................................................................... 174

6.8

TRACE ..................................................................................................................... 175

6.8.1

Select Trace........................................................................................................ 175

6.8.2

Layout ................................................................................................................. 175

6.8.3

Trace Display and Layout（DMA） ................................................................... 176

6.8.4

Trace Display and Layout（AMA） ................................................................... 176

6.8.5

Select Trace........................................................................................................ 176

6.8.6

Num of Traces .................................................................................................... 176

6.8.7

Data .................................................................................................................... 176

6.8.8

Format ................................................................................................................ 177

XXVIII

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.8.9

Eye Length.......................................................................................................... 177

6.8.10

Symbol Table ...................................................................................................... 178

6.9

MARKER .................................................................................................................. 178

6.9.1

Select Marker & Select Trace............................................................................. 178

6.9.2

Marker Type........................................................................................................ 178

6.9.3

Marker X ............................................................................................................. 180

6.9.4

Reset Delta ......................................................................................................... 180

6.9.5

Relative To.......................................................................................................... 180

6.9.6

Marker Couple .................................................................................................... 181

7

INPUT AND OUTPUT ................................................................................................... 182
7.1

FREQ REF INPUT ...................................................................................................... 182

7.2

INPUT Z CORRECTION .............................................................................................. 182

7.3

GPS ................................................................................................ 错误!未定义书签。

7.3.1

GPS Switch................................................................................. 错误!未定义书签。

7.3.2

Clock Synchronization Button .................................................... 错误!未定义书签。

7.4

BIAS ....................................................................................................................... 185

7.4.1

Bias switch .......................................................................................................... 185

7.4.2

Bias voltage ........................................................................................................ 185

8

SYSTEM SETTINGS ..................................................................................................... 187
8.1

SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 187

8.1.1

About .................................................................................................................. 187

8.1.2

Hardware ............................................................................................................ 188

8.1.3

Log Record ......................................................................................................... 188

8.1.4

Language ............................................................................................................ 188

8.1.5

Connect Setting .................................................................................................. 189

8.1.6

Date and Time .................................................................................................... 191

8.1.7

Option ................................................................................................................. 191

8.1.8

Upgrade .............................................................................................................. 191

8.2

RESET ..................................................................................................................... 192

8.2.1

Preset ................................................................................................................. 192

8.2.2

Preset Type ........................................................................................................ 192

8.2.3

Save User Config ............................................................................................... 192

www.siglent.com

XXIXSHA850A User Manual

8.2.4

Power On ............................................................................................................ 192

8.2.5

Factory Reset ..................................................................................................... 193

8.2.6

Reset&Clear ....................................................................................................... 193

8.3

ALIGNMENTS ............................................................................................................ 193

8.4

FILE ......................................................................................................................... 194

8.5

DISPLAY................................................................................................................... 195

8.6

POWER .................................................................................................................... 196

8.7

SELF TEST ............................................................................................................... 196

8.7.1

Screen Test ........................................................................................................ 196

8.7.2

Keyboard Test .................................................................................................... 196

8.7.3

LCD Test............................................................................................................. 196

8.7.4

Touch Test .......................................................................................................... 196

9REMOTE CONTROL .................................................................................................... 197
9.1

REMOTELY OPERATING THE ANALYZER..................................................................... 197

9.1.1

USB Device port ................................................................................................. 197

9.1.2

LAN port.............................................................................................................. 197

9.1.3

GPIB-USB Host port ........................................................................................... 198

9.2

BUILD COMMUNICATION............................................................................................ 199

9.2.1

VISA .................................................................................................................... 199

9.2.2

Sockets/Telnet .................................................................................................... 201

9.3

REMOTE CONTROL CAPABILITIES.............................................................................. 201

9.3.1

User-defined Programming ................................................................................ 201

9.3.2

NI MAX ............................................................................................................... 202

9.3.3

Web browser....................................................................................................... 205

10

SCPI OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................... 206

10.1

COMMAND FORMAT .................................................................................................. 206

10.2

SYMBOL INSTRUCTION .............................................................................................. 206

10.3

PARAMETER TYPE .................................................................................................... 207

10.4

COMMAND ABBREVIATION ........................................................................................ 208

10.5IEEE COMMON COMMANDS ..................................................................................... 208

10.6

SCPI LIST............................................................................................................... 211

XXX

10.6.1

GPSA .................................................................................................................. 211

10.6.2

VNA .................................................................................................................... 215
www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

10.6.3

CAT ..................................................................................................................... 218

10.6.4

MA....................................................................................................................... 220

10.6.5

Other ................................................................................................................... 222

11

SERVICE AND SUPPORT ........................................................................................... 223

11.1

SERVICE SUMMARY .................................................................................................. 223

11.2

TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 223

www.siglent.com

XXXI

SHA850A User Manual1

Quick Start

This chapter guides users to quickly get familiar with the appearance, panel and the user interface, as
well as announcements during the first use of the analyzer.

1.1

General Inspection

When you get a new analyzer, it is recommended that you proceed through the following steps.

Check to see if there is any damage caused by shipping problems
If the packing case or foam protective pad is seriously damaged, keep it until the whole machine andaccessories pass the electrical and mechanical tests.

Inspection machine
If you notice external damage, contact your SIGLENT dealer or local office, and SIGLENT will arrange
for a repair or replacement.

Check the accessories
Please check the accessories according to the packing list in the box. If the accessories areincomplete or damaged, please contact your SIGLENT sales representative.

www.siglent.com

1

SHA850A User Manual

1.2
1.2.1

Preparing for Use
Appearance and Dimension

Unit:mmFigure 1-1 Front and lateral View

The included tilting stand is available for desktop operation. The tilting bracket provides a backward tilt
for improved stability. To deploy the tilt bracket, pull the bottom of the tilt bracket away from the backof the instrument. To retract the tilting bracket, push the bottom of the bracket toward the back of the
instrument.

Figure 1-2 Side View

2

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

1.2.2Power Supply Information

The battery that comes with the analyzer may need to be recharged before use. The device can use
the supplied AC-DC adapter (refer to the product technical data sheet for ordering information). The
specifications of the input AC power supply are: 100-240V, 50/60Hz; Or charge through the on-board
DC adapter in the accessory.
Specifically, the analyzer can be connected to the adapter according to the power socket shown in the
figure below.

Power socket
Figure 1-3 Rear View and Power◆

Adapter factory configuration is the 12V 4A◆

Battery factory installed, the user can change itself

WARNING
This instrument can only use Siglent approved batteries, adapters andchargers. When using an onboard DC adapter, always ensure that the power
supply is rated at least 75 W @ 15 VDC and that there is no dust or debris on
the socket. If the adapter plug becomes hot during operation, discontinue use
immediately. Siglent recommends taking out the batteries when devices aren't
used for too long.

www.siglent.com

3

SHA850A User Manual

1.3

Front Panel
2 3 4

1

7

5

6

Figure 1-4 the Front Panel

Table 1-1 Front Panel Description
NO.

Name

Description

1

LCD Screen

8.4 inch multi-touch screen, resolution 800*600

Power Switch

Stand by status: Orange
Power on status: White
Short press: To Stand by status with current state saved
Long press: To Stand by status without current state saved

3

Function Keys

Complete the function control and parameter input of theanalyzer, and most operations can be completed by the touch
screen.
Press Lock to turn off/on the keyboard and touchfunctions.

4

Three-dimensional
knob

Complete the quick adjustment and selection of parameters.

5

Fan vent

Built-in fan external exhaust port. Please ensure that this ventis unblocked.

6

Battery case coverInternal battery protection cover. Remove during battery
replacement.

7

Detachable
hand strap

Convenient hand force, can be installed on both sides.

2

4

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Table 1-2 Shorcut Keys Description
Name

Description
The menu selection window pops up on the screen, and you can use the touch
screen control to directly enter a function menu.
Shortcut screenshot button to save the current screen display as a picture. Saveparameters, such as path, reverse color, and screenshot area, to be set in
System > File.
Measurement control, pause or resume the current measurement process.
When the button light is on, the measurement is suspended. When the button
light is off, the measurement is resumed.
Key and touch screen lock control.
When the button light is on, all key pad buttons and touch screen buttons except
the Lock button are locked to prevent misoperation.

The function key part of the front panel is the reuse key of menu selection mode and value input mode,
which can be switched by Enter and Esc :www.siglent.com

5

SHA850A User Manual◆

Under default reset, the operation interface is in menu selection mode, and function keys willbe identified as the blue silk screen function identifier on the upper side of the key. Use
Enter to switch from menu selection mode to value input mode.

◆

When the operation interface is in value input mode, the multiplex key will be identified as thewhite silk screen digital identifier inside the key. You can use Esc to switch from value
input mode to menu selection mode.

Table 1-3 Function Keys Description
Name

Description
Menu selection mode, to select the analyzer operation mode, such as spectrum
analysis mode, antenna and cable test mode, network analyzer mode, etc.
In menu selection mode, control of mode measurement parameters, such as
average times, specific test items, etc.
In menu selection mode, frequency parameters are controlled. In time domain
analysis, length (distance) parameters are controlled.
Menu selection mode, bandwidth class parameter control, such as RBW, VBW,IFBW and so on.
In menu selection mode, control cursor Marker parameters, such as cursor type,cursor positioning, noise cursor, N dB bandwidth, etc.
Menu selection mode, for amplitude class parameters control, such as scale andunit, as well as preattenuator, preamplifier, amplitude correction, etc.
In the menu selection mode, control the scanning parameters, such as scanning
time and type, scanning number, trigger, gating, etc.
In the menu selection mode, control the peak parameters, such as peak search,peak rule setting, etc.
In menu selection mode, trace parameters are controlled, such as trace state,
detection, mathematical calculation, normalization, etc.
In menu selection mode, control the parameters of limit line, such as limit line
editing, margin, test state setting, etc.
In menu selection mode, port calibration of antenna and cable test mode andnetwork analysis mode is carried out, such as selecting the type of mechanicalcalibration part, user-defined calibration part parameters, loading electroniccalibration part, etc.
In menu selection mode, reset parameters can be controlled, such as reset status
definition, power-on status definition, user status definition, etc.
In the menu selection mode, you can perform file operations, such as saving andinvoking files, and viewing file browsers.
In menu selection mode, the system general information view, version andcalibration operation, as well as input and output port Settings, screen display
Settings, etc.

6

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

1.4

Rear Panel
1

5

4

2

3

6

7 8 9 10 11 12

Figure 1-5 Rear Panel

Table 1-4 Rear Panel Description
NO.

Name

Description

1

RF In/
Port 2Signal input: 50Ω N female connector.
Maximum input ±50 VDC, + 30 dBm.

2

Trig In

Trigger input is a BNC female connector. When the analyzer uses anexternal trigger mode, the connector receives a rising or falling edge ofan external trigger signal that is used to establish event synchronization.

Ref InReference clock input, BNC female connector. The analyzer can use aninternal reference clock or an external reference clock. If the instrument
detects a signal from an external 10 MHz reference clock, it
automatically uses the signal as the analyzer's reference clock source.
At this time the screen status bar frequency reference display external;
When the external 10 MHz reference signal is lost, exceeded, or notconnected, the analyzer's reference clock is automatically switched tothe internal 10 MHz reference clock, and the screen frequency
reference bar will display the internal.
[Ref In] is used to establish clock synchronization between multiple
instruments.

4

Source/Port 1The signal output and input terminals are 50Ω N female connectors.
In spectrum analysis mode, signal output as an independent signal
source.
In the network analysis mode, as the excitation and receiving interface,
this port built-in coupler, to achieve a single port vector network analysis
function.

5K-groove

Slots are provided to accept Kensignton® cable locks.

6

GPS Ant

The GPS antenna port is a SMA female connector used to install the
GPS antenna and receive GPS satellite signals.
Can provide 3.3V DC feed for active GPS antenna.

3

www.siglent.com

7

SHA850A User Manual

7

Bias OutThe offset voltage output port is a 50Ω female SMB connector.
Used to provide bias voltage for external signal amplifiers, such as
tower amplifiers.

8USB
DeviceThe main USB port is TypeC. The analyzer can be used as a slave
device and connected to a PC via USB cable. The PC uses the
USB-TMC protocol to remotely control the analyzer.

USB
Host

USB slave port, TypeB. The analyzer can be used as the main device
and is connected to external USB devices through this port. For
example,Connect external extended memory to read files in memory, or store thecurrent instrument state, data, or current screen display content intomemory;Connect a USB keyboard, USB mouse, or other USB receiver; Connect
USB-GPIB adapter to realize GPIB remote control of analyzer;
Connect electronic calibration parts to realize automatic calibration ofanalyzer.

10

Audio
output3.5mm headphone jack. The analyzer provides AM and FM
demodulation functions.
The headphone jack is used to insert the headphone to listen to theaudio output of the demodulation signal. You can turn on or off theheadset and adjust the volume of the headset through the menu.

11

LAN

RJ45 ports. The analyzer is connected to the LAN through network
cable, and can be viewed and controlled remotely through VXI, Socket
protocol, or a web browser.

12External
power
supply2.5mm x 5.5mm barrel connector, connected to 12V 4A power adapter
charging port, center positive. Used to power devices and charge
batteries.

98

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

WARNING
The analyzer does not support DC input. To avoid damage to the instrument,
the DC voltage component of the signal reaching the RF input must not exceed
50 V.
If possible, add an isolated DC component to the RF input of the analyzer
before signal measurement.

WARNING
In order to avoid damage to the instrument, the DC voltage component of thesignal input to the RF input should not exceed 50 V;
When the frequency is greater than 10 MHz, the maximum continuous power ofthe RF signal shall not exceed +33 dBm.
When the frequency is less than 10 MHz, the maximum continuous power ofthe RF signal should not exceed +20 dBm.

WARNING
Before connecting any signal, short connect the inner core of the test cable tothe housing floor to release the static electricity accumulated on the inner coreof the test cable.

www.siglent.com

9

SHA850A User Manual

1.5

User Interface

Figure 1-5 User Interface of spectrum analyzer mode

Table 1-5 Spectrum Analyzer Mode User Interface

10

No

Name

Description

1

SIGLENTSIGLENT logo2Mode/Measure

Indicate the current working mode and measurement function of
the analyzer, and click to switch, such as spectrum analysis
mode, real-time spectrum mode, etc.

3

Hardwarestatus bar

Indicates the status of hardware, interfaces, etc.

4

Measurement
status bar

Indicates measurement status of reference level, attenuation,
cursor, etc.

5

Resultarea

The measurement results are displayed in various forms such as
spectral lines, cursors, tables and constellation charts.

6

Scanparameter area

Indicates and controls major scan parameters.

7

Menu area

Used to configure measurement Settings.

display

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

1.6

Touch screen and mouse operation

The analyzer provides a 8.4 inch multi-touch screen and supports various gesture operations
including:◆

Slide the waveform left and right or up and down in the measurement result area to change theX-axis center coordinate or Y-axis reference coordinatePerform two-points scaling in the
waveform area to change the X-axis span◆

The waveform is scaled horizontally at two points in the measurement result area to change theX-axis display range◆

Click the shortcut menu area, working status area, scanning parameter area and menu area forfunction selection◆

Click editable parameters, virtual numeric keyboard or QWERT keyboard will pop up, parameteror text editing◆

Open and drag the cursor◆

When the mouse is connected, clicking the left mouse button has the same effect as a single
touch

You can turn the touch screen function on and off via

Lock

.

Table 1-6 Touch Operations
No

Name

Description

1

Click

Most controls just need to be tapped, touched and released.

Double click

Some controls require double clicking.
If the second press is not detected within a specific time
period, the operation is cancelled or treated as a single press.

Press and dragSome objects can be dragged.
This is done by gently holding down the action object anddragging it to a new position while releasing it. For example,
you can drag items such as tags, limit line nodes, and center
frequencies by dragging tracks left or right.

Pinch or release

Some projects can be scaled down or expanded.
This is done by pressing down with two fingers at the sametime and gently holding the item as you pull the fingers closer
or further, then releasing. You can pull items in and out, suchas frequency spans, by touching and holding the trace in two
locations, then pulling your finger closer to narrow the span orpulling your finger further to widen it.

2

3

4

www.siglent.com

11

SHA850A User Manual

1.7

Firmware Operation

1.7.1

Check System Information

Users can get the system information by press⚫

Product Model, Serial and Host ID⚫

Software Version and hardware Version⚫

Option Information

1.7.2

System> “System” -> “About” , including

Load Option

Refer to the procedures below to activate the options you have purchased.
System> “System”-> “Load Option”

1

Press

2

Enter the license key in the onscreen window. PressEnter

to confirm your input andterminate the license key input. Or
3

Load the .lic file provided by pressing

File> “Load” from internal memory or USB stick.

The option will be enabled after rebooting.

1.7.3

Firmware Upgrade

Follow this procedure to update the instrument firmware:
1.

Download the firmware package from an official SIGLENT website.

2.

Extract and copy the .ADS file into the root directory of an USB stick.

3.

Plug the USB stick into the USB Host connector. Press

System> “System” -> “Update” ; findthe .ADS file in USB stick.
4.

Press the “Load”, the analyzer will perform the update process automatically.

The upgrade process will take several minutes. When the upgrade is completed,the machine will reboot.
Any interruption during the update process will result in update failure and systemdata loss. This is not covered under the warranty and the user will bear repair
costs and shipping.
Do not remove the USB storage device until the update is finished.

1.8

Communication and Remote Control

The analyzer supports communication with computers via USB, LAN, and GPIB-USB interfaces. By
using these interfaces, in combination with programming languages and/or NI-VISA software, users
can remotely control the analyzer based on a SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable
Instruments) compliant command set, LabView and IVI (Interchangeable Virtual Instrument), to12

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manualinteroperate with other programmable instruments.
You can also go to

System> System > Interface Settings > Web Services and set thecorresponding communication port to view and control the analyzer directly on a PC or mobile
terminal using a web browser. For more details, refer to the ‘User Guide’.

1.9

Service and Support

SIGLENT warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects inmaterials and workmanship for a period of three years (accessories for a period of one year) from thedate of shipment from an authorized Siglent distributor.
If the product proves defective within the respective period, SIGLENT will provide repair or
replacement as described in the complete warranty statement. To arrange for service or obtain a copyof the complete warranty statement, please contact your nearest Siglent sales and service office.
Except as provided in this summary or the applicable warranty statement, SIGLENT makes nowarranty of any kind, express or implied, including without limitation the implied warranties ofmerchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall SIGLENT be liable for indirect,
special or consequential damages.

1.10 Troubleshooting
Troubleshoot the analyzer according to the following steps:1.

Switch on the power and the instrument will enter the charging state. The backlight of the powerswitch on the front panel will light up orange (charging)/green (full).
If the power switch on the front panel is not on:◆

2.

Check that the power switch is turned on and that the power connector is properly connected

Press the power switch on the front panel, and the instrument will turn on. The color of the powerswitch on the front panel will turn white. At the same time, the fan on the back will turn and thescreen will light up.
If the instrument does not enter the power on state normally:◆

Check whether the fan and screen are loose or damaged◆

If the fan and screen are normally powered on, but the screen stops in the startup screen, orthe button does not respondIf the above problems exist, do not disassemble the instrument and contact SIGLENT in time.

3.

The analyzer enters the working state normally, and the buttons and touch screen should
respond to the measurement operation normally.
If the instrument does not work properly:www.siglent.com

13

SHA850A User Manual◆

Check that the analyzer is working in the remote control lock state◆

Check whether the analyzer can be controlled using the mouse and keyboard◆

Check whether the analyzer can be controlled using VNC or remote commands

◆

Press

System> Self-Test > Screen Test/Key Test /LED test/Touch test to check

whether there is any response or interference between the key and screen◆

Check whether strong electromagnetic fields exist around the analyzer. Strong
electromagnetic fields will affect the response of the capacitor touch screen

If the above problems exist, do not disassemble the instrument and contact SIGLENT in time.

4.

The analyzer should be in scanning or measuring state when working normally, and the screen
waveform and parameters are in updating state.
If the instrument screen waveform or parameters are not updated for a long time:

5.

◆

Check whether the current trace is in View state or multiple averaging state◆

Check whether the trigger conditions are not met and wait. Check the trigger Settings andwhether there is a trigger signal◆

Check whether it is currently in a single scan state, or whether it is in a measurement
calculation state◆

Check whether the current scan time is set too long or whether the measured dwell time isset too long

Incorrect or inaccurate measurement:
Users can obtain detailed instructions on technical indicators from the back of this manual tocalculate systematic errors, check measurement results and accuracy problems. To achieve theperformance indicators listed in this manual, you need:◆

The instrument is in the calibration cycle, stored in the working temperature of 20℃~30℃ forat least two hours, and preheated for more than 40 minutes

14◆

Have a certain understanding of the measured signal, and set the appropriate parameters forthe instrument◆

Check that external devices are properly connected and working, and that line losses arecorrectly compensated◆

Check whether signal tracing, frequency offset, amplitude offset, or correction functions areapplied◆Check whether an external reference clock source is applied◆

The instrument is measured and calibrated regularly to compensate for measuring errors
caused by aging and other factors. For calibration, contact SIGLENT, Inc., or an authorizedmeasurement provider for paid service.

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.

Pop-up message:
The instrument will give prompt message, error message or status message according to thestate it is in. These messages can help the user to use the device correctly, not the device failure.

www.siglent.com

15

SHA850A User Manual

2

Mode & Measurement

The analyzer operates in multiple operating modes, each of which contains several measurements:

Figure 2-1 Mode selection⚫

Spectrum Analyzer Mode (GPSA)⚫

Cable and Antenna Mode (CAT)⚫

Vector Network Analyzer Mode (VNA)⚫

Modulation Analyzer Mode (MA)

Figure 2-2 GPSA measurement selection

16

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual⚫

Spectrum Analyzer Mode(GPSA) :Swept Spectrum Analyzer (Swept SA)
Channel Power (CH Power)
Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR)
Occupied BW (OBW)
T-Power (T-Power)
Third Order Intercept (TOI)
Spectrum Monitor (Spectrum Monitor)
Carrier Noise Ratio (CNR)
Harmonic Analysis (Harmonic)
IQ Acquisition

Figure 2-3 CAT measurement selection⚫

Cable and Antenna Mode (CAT) :Distance to Fault
Return Loss
VSWR
Cable Loss
Insertion Loss
Time Domain Reflectometry
DTF&Return Loss

www.siglent.com

17

SHA850A User Manual

TDR&Return Loss
TDR&DTF⚫

Vector Network Analyzer Mode (VNA)⚫

Modulation Analyzer Mode (MA) :Digital Modulation Analyzer (DMA)
Analog Modulation Analyzer (AMA)

The analyzer supports the creation of multiple independent modes / measurements, but only one ofthem can be activated at the same time. Wait until the next activation to restore the state before
switching

18

Command Format:INSTrument[:SELect]:INSTrument[:SELect]?

Instruction

Select the working mode of the spectrum analyzer.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

SA: Spectrum Analysis Mode
MA: Modulation Analysis
RTSA: Real-Time Spectrum Analysis

ReturnEnumeration

Example:INSTrument MA

Command Format:INSTrument:MEASure:INSTrument:MEASure?

Instruction

Get/Set the measurement mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

SA: Spectrum Analysis
ACPR: Adjacent Channel Power Ratio
CHPower: Channel Power
OBW: Occupy Bandwidth
TPOWer: Time-Domain Power
SPECtrogram: Spectrogram
TOI: Third-Order Intermodulation
HARMonics: Harmonic Analysis
CNR: Carrier-to-Noise Ratio

ReturnEnumeration: SA||ACPR|CHP|OBW|TPOW|SPEC|TOI|HARM|CNR

Example:INSTrument:MEASure ACPR

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual3

Spectrum Analyzer Mode

The Spectrum Analyzer Mode is the default mode of the analyzer.

3.1

Frequency & Span

3.1.1

Frequency & Span

Set the frequency-related parameters and functions of the analyzer. The sweep will restart every time
the frequency parameters are modified.
The frequency range of a channel can be expressed by these parameters: Start Frequency, Center
Frequency, Stop Frequency and Span. If any of the parameters change, the others will be adjusted
automatically in order to ensure the coupling relationship among them:𝑓center = (𝑓start + 𝑓stop )/2
𝑓span = 𝑓stop − 𝑓start , Where 𝑓𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛 is the span.
The LO will sweep from the Start Frequency to the Stop Frequency if the Span > 0, while the LO is
fixed at a constant frequency if Span = 0 ( Zero Span).
Span change, associated with BW and scan parameters.
After the frequency related parameters are changed, restart scanning \ measurement.
Last sweep sets the sweep width to the value before the last modification.
Zoom in sets the sweep width to half the current sweep width value.
Zoom out sets the sweep width to twice the current sweep width value.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets the center frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

50 Hz~7.5 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer 0.2 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Sets the start frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the start Frequency.

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 7.5 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 7.5 GHz

Example:FREQuency:STARt 100 Hz

www.siglent.com

19

SHA850A User Manual

20

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Sets the stop frequency of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the stop frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter
Range

100 Hz ~ 7.5 GHz
Zero Span: 0 ~ 7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?

Instruction

Sets the frequency span. Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zerospan.
Gets span value.

NOTE

Channel Power Only : [:SENSe]:CHPower:REQuency:SPANOBW Only : [:SENSe]:OBWidth:REQuency:SPAN
ACPR Only : [:SENSe]:ACPower:REQuency:SPANTOI Only : [:SENSe]:TOI:REQuency:SPAN
CNR Only : [:SENSe]:CNR:REQuency:SPAN

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz, 100 Hz ~ 28GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:SPAN 1 GHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to full scale.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to zero span.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to the previous span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to half of the current span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to double the current span setting.

Example:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.1.2

X Axis Scale

Set the scale type of X-axis to Linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale.
In Log scale type, the frequency scale of X-axis is displayed in the logarithmic form.

3.1.3

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instruction

Sets the The x type
Gets the The x type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Return

LOG/LIN

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing LOG:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:SPACing?

Freq Offset

Set the frequency offset value to illustrate the frequency conversion between the measured device
and the input of the spectrum analyzer.
⚫

This parameter does not affect any hardware settings of the spectrum analyzer, but only changes
the display values of center frequency, start frequency and stop frequency.

⚫

To eliminate the frequency offset value, the frequency offset value can be set to 0 Hz.

3.1.4

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instruction

Sets the frequency offset of the spectrum analyzer.
Gets the frequency offset.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range-100 GHz ~ 100 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:OFFSet 1 GHz

Freq Step

Setting the value of Freq Step will change the direction key step of center frequency, start frequency,
stop frequency and frequency offset.
⚫

At a fixed step change the value of the center frequency can reach the purpose of switchingmeasurement channels rapidly and continuously.

⚫

There are two kinds of frequency step modes：Auto and Manual. In Auto mode, the Freq step is
1/10 of the span in Non-zero span or equals the RBW while in Zero Span. In Manual mode, you
can set the step using the numeric keys.

www.siglent.com

21

SHA850A User Manual

3.1.5

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instruction

Specifies the center frequency step size.
Gets the center frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP 2 MHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO?

Instruction

Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span.
Gets center frequency step mode.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF

Auto Tune

Automatically search the signal in the full frequency band and adjust the frequency and amplitude
parameters to the best state. One key to perform signal search and automatic parameter setting.
⚫

When this function is enabled, Auto Tune is displayed in the status bar of the screen. After the
automatic search is complete, Auto Tune disappears.

⚫

Reference level, scale size, input attenuation and other parameters may be modified during
automatic search.

3.2

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate

Instruction

Perform auto tune

Parameter TypeNo parameter

Parameter Range

No parameter

ReturnNo returnExample:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediateBW

The bandwidth menu contains the RBW (Resolution Bandwidth), VBW (Video Bandwidth), averagetype and filter type. Filter type includes the EMI filter type that enables EMI measurement controls.

3.2.1

Resolution Bandwidth

Set the resolution bandwidth in order to distinguish between signals which have frequency
components that are near one another.
⚫

Reducing the RBW will increase the frequency resolution, but will also increase the sweep time
dramatically (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and VBW when the analyzer is in22

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Auto mode).
⚫

Generally, the frequency resolution ability is affected by RBW, RBW Filter shape factor, LO
Phase noise, and LO Residual FM.

⚫

RBW varies with the span (non-zero span) in Auto RBW mode.

⚫

Under EMI filter, RBW can only be set to 200 Hz, 9 kHz, 120 kHz and 1 MHz with a 6dB shapefactor.

3.2.2

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Specifies the resolution bandwidth. For numeric entries, all RBW types choose
the nearest (arithmetically, on a linear scale, rounding up) available RBW to thevalue entered.
Gets the resolution bandwidth.

NOTE[:SENSe]:CHPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TOI:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:HARMonics:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TPOWer:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:CNR:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth 1 kHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO?

Instruction

Turn on/off auto resolution bandwidth state.
Gets the resolution bandwidth auto state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:BWID:AUTO On

Video Bandwidth

Set the video bandwidth in order to filter out the noise outside the video band.
⚫

Reducing the VBW will smooth the trace and helps to highlight small signals from noise, but it will
also increase the sweep time (Sweep Time is affected by a combination of RBW and VBW when
it is in Auto mode).

⚫

VBW varies with RBW when it is in Auto mode. While in Manual mode, VBW is not affected byRBW.

www.siglent.com

23

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo?

Instruction

Specifies the video bandwidth.
Gets the video bandwidth.
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:ACPower:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TOI:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:HARMonics:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:TPOWer:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:BANDwidth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:CNR:BANDwidth[:RESolution]

NOTE

3.2.3

Parameter Type

Discrete

Parameter Range

1Hz , 3Hz , 10 Hz , 30 Hz , 100 Hz , 300 Hz , 1 kHz , 3 kHz , 10 kHz , 30 kHz ,100 kHz , 300 kHz , 1 MHz , 3 MHz , 10 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo 10 kHz

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto video bandwidth state.
Gets the video bandwidth state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

ExampleBWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO OFF

V/R Ratio

Set the ratio of VBW to RBW. This value is different while measuring different kinds of signals:⚫

Sine/Continuous Wave (CW) signals:Use 1 to 3 (for faster sweeps)⚫

Pulsed/transient signals:Use 10 (to reduce the influence on the amplitude of transient signals)⚫

Noise signals:Generally use 0.1 (to obtain the average of noises)

24

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio?

Instruction

Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.
Gets the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth.

Parameter Type

Discrete, Float

Parameter Range

0.001, 0.003, 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0, 30.0, 100.0, 300.0, 1000.0

Return

Float

Example:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio 30

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.3

Sweep

3.3.1

Sweep Points

The number of sweep points represents the number of sweep and trace displayed points(201~10001).
More sweep points will improve the resolution of waveform, but also affect the minimum sweep time,and increase the time of data processing and remote access to data, and reduce the response rate.
Under the influence of the scheme, when the sweep type is FFT, the sweep points cannot remain
effective all the time, and the actual output points may be less than the sweep points in some states.
Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts?

Instruction

Sets sweep points.
Gets sweep points.

Parameter TypeintegerParameter Range

201-10001

Example:SWEep:POINts 2001
:SWEep:POINts?

3.3.2

Sweep Time & Sweep Time Rules

When the sweep type is normal swept, you can change the sweep time (SWT) to control the timerequired to sweep the current frequency range. The sweep time supports automatic mode and manualmode:
AutoSWT refers to the appropriate sweep time of the analyzer according to the relevant configurationline operation, which satisfies the following calculation logic:

When Span>0:
AutoSWT = 𝑚𝑎𝑥[ minSWT, 𝑘 ∗ (𝑓span /RBW / VBW), Points * ResTimeperPoint];
k = 3、12;
minSWT = 1 ms

When Span=0:
AutoSWT = 𝑚𝑎𝑥[ minSWT , Points * ResTimeperPoint];
minSWT = 1 us

Where velocity factor K =3 or 12, corresponding to two supported Sweep Time Rules:Speed or
Accuracy; ResTimeperPoint Represents the DSP response time of a sweep point,it is inversely
correlated with RBW value.

www.siglent.com

25

SHA850A User Manual

Users can also manually set the sweep time based on actual requirements.But it needs to be satisfied:
When Span>0: 1ms <= SWT <= 4ks
When Span=0: 1us <= SWT <= 6ks

In general, the manual sweep time should not be longer than the automatic sweep time in thiscondition. Otherwise, unforeseeable anomalies may be caused and may be marked (UNCAL).
It should be pointed out in particular that under the influence of the scheme, when the sweep type is
FFT, the sweep time can only be calculated by the instrument itself, and any modification related tothe sweep time cannot take effect.

3.3.3

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display. A span value of
0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode. In zero span the X-axis
represents time rather than frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

1us ~ 6000s

ReturnFloat, unit: s

Example:SWEep:TIME 5s

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turns on/off auto sweep time state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed NORMal|ACCUracy[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed?

Instruction

Toggles the sweep speed between normal and accuracy.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ACCUracy|NORMal

Example:SWEep: SPEed NORMal

Sweep Time Estimate

The estimated sweep time represents the time actually consumed by each sweep, including data
sampling time (sweep time) and related scheduling time.

26

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

The estimated sweep time cannot be modified。

3.3.4

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure
Single/Continue controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure,

RestartRestart the current sweep or measure. In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart
will be performed.

Command format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instructions

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:RESTart

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:RESTart

3.4

Amplitude

Set the amplitude parameters of the analyzer. Through modifying these parameters, signals undermeasurement can be displayed in a proper mode for easier observation and minimum error. Anychange of Ref Level, Attenuator Value, Preamp mode and Ref Offset will restart sweep.

3.4.1

Ref Level

Set the maximum power or voltage that can be currently displayed in the trace window. The value isdisplayed at the upper left corner of the screen grid.
The maximum reference (Ref) level available is affected by the maximum mixing level; input
attenuation is adjusted under a constant maximum mixing level in order to fulfill the following
condition:www.siglent.com

27

SHA850A User Manual

Note: the maximum reference level of different machine models may be different, please refer to thedata manual specifically.

3.4.2

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, W

Parameter Range

Unit is dBm : -170 dBm ~ 23 dBm
Unit is dBmV : -123.01 dBmV ~ 69.99 dBmV
Unit is dBuV : -63.01 dBuV ~ 129.99 dBuV
Unit is dBuA : -96.99 dBuA ~ 96.01 dBuA
Unit is Volts : 707.11pV ~ 3.16 V
Unit is Watts : 0W ~ 199.53m W

ReturnFloat , unit: dBm

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:RLEVel 20 DBM

Attenuator

Set the value for the internal attenuator of the RF input. So that the large signal can be low distortionand the small signal can pass through the mixer with low noise.

Input attenuation can be set up to auto or manual mode.
⚫

Auto mode: the attenuation value is automatically adjusted according to the state of preamplifier
and the current reference level.

⚫

The maximum input attenuation can be set to 50dB , resolution: 2dB. When the set parameters
do not meet the above formula, you can adjust the reference level.

28

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instructions

Sets/gets the attenuation value

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 dB ~ 50 dB (Even gears only)

ReturnInteger , unit dB

Example:POWer:ATTenuation 10

Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the auto attenuation value switch

Parameter Type

Booleanwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

3.4.3

RF Preamp

Control the state of the internal preamplifier (PA) located in the RF input signal path. When thesignal-under-measurement is small, turning on the preamplifier can reduce the displayed noise level
and aid distinguishing small signals from the noise.
The corresponding icon “PA” will appear at the left side of the screen when the preamplifier is turnedon.
Command format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the preset amplifier inside the switch spectrometer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:POWer:GAIN ON

3.4.4

Ref Offset

Assign an offset to the reference level to compensate for gains or losses generated between thedevice under measurement and the analyzer.
The change of this value changes both the reference level readout and the amplitude readout of themarker; but does not impact the position of traces on the screen.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets the frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB~100 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet 2

3.4.5

Y Axis Scale

3.4.5.1 Scale
Users can change the display range of Y axis by adjusting the scale. The scaling is allowed only thescale type is Log.
⚫

Setting different scales can adjust the display range of the current interface amplitude;www.siglent.com

29

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instructions

Sets/gets the scale on which trace logarithms are displayed

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1 dB ~ 20 dB

ReturnFloat , unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

3.4.5.2 Scale TypeSet the scale type of the Y-axis to Lin or Log. The default is Log.
⚫

In Lin mode, the vertical Scale value cannot be changed. The Display area is set for reference
level of 0%.

⚫

In Log scale type, the Y-axis denotes the logarithmic coordinate. The value shown at the top of
the grid is the reference level and each grid represent the scale value. The unit of Y-axis willautomatically switch to the default unit (dBm) in Log scale type when the scale type is changed
from Lin to Log.

⚫

In Lin scale type, the Y-axis denotes the liner coordinate; the values shown at the top of the gridand the bottom of the grid are the reference level and 0 V. The scale setting function is invalid.
The unit of Y-axis will automatically switch to the default unit (Volts) in Lin scale type when thescale type is charged from Log to Lin.

⚫

The scale type does not affect the setting of Y-axis unit.

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing LINear|LOGarithmic:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the scale display type

Parameter Type

Enumeration : LINear |LOGarithmic

ReturnEnumeration : LIN|LOG

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SPACing LINear

3.4.5.3 Unit
Set the unit of the Y-axis to dBm, dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, Volts (RMS) or Watts. Default is dBm.
The conversion relationships between units are as follows.
Where, R denotes the reference impedance. The default value is 50Ω and can be adjusted bypressing “Correction -> RF input”.
dBm = 10lg (Volts 2
1
×
)
R
1mW
Volts

dBμV = 20lg ( 1μV )30www.siglent.com

SHA850A User ManualdBmV = 20lg (dBμA = 10 lg (Watts =

Volts
)
1mV

Volts 21
×) − 10 lg(R) +10lg109
R
1mW

Volts2
R

Command format:UNIT:POWer DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W:UNIT:POWer?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display unit of magnitude

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBM|DBMV|DBUV|DBUA|V|W

ReturnEnumeration：DBM|DBMV|DBUV|V|W

Example:UNIT:POWer DBMV

www.siglent.com

31

SHA850A User Manual

3.5

Correction

Measured value can be corrected in specific x-axis and y-axis. Now, there are eight corrections, witch
enter into force at the same time.

Select Correction
Select a correction (1-8) to operating.

Correct Switch
If the selected switch enter into force.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe][:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe]?

Illustration

Set Correction Switch Status

Parameter Type

Boolean

Menu

Input/Output>Correction

Return Value

0|1

example:CORRection:CSET1 0:CORRection:CSET2 1Edit Correction
Editing, preserving, loading the selected correction.

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DATA {x1,y1 }[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DATA?

Illustration

Get/Set correction points

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:DATA 10000000,-15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:ADD {x1,y1 }Illustration

Add Correction Point

Parameter Type

Character String of Correction Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range

32

Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:ADD 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:CORRection:CSET1:ADD10000000,15

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:POINt:DELete

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Illustration

Delete a special correction point.

Parameter Type

Serial Number

Menu

Input/Output>Correction>Edit Correction

example:CORRection:CSET1:POINt:DELete 0

Close All the Correction
All the correction is not effective.

Delet One/All the Correction
Empty all the points of a specail/all correction(s).

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET[1]2|3|...|8:DELete

Illustration

Delete all points of a special correction.

exampleCORRection:CSET1:DELete

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

Illustration

Delete all the corrections

example:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

www.siglent.com

33

SHA850A User Manual

3.6

Field Strength

Field strength measurement is mainly used to test electric field strength. The electric field strength test
is to measure the electric field strength in the current environment through the receiving antenna,
usually in dBV/m. A typical measurement system consists of: spectrum analyzer + coaxial cable +receiving antenna, calculation formula: E (electric field strength dBuV/m) = Er (spectrum analyzer
reading voltage value dBuV) + AF (antenna coefficient of the antenna used dB/m )+L (coaxial cable
loss dB).
In the handheld spectrum analyzer, the entry for field strength measurement is Ampt menu -> Field
strength measurement menu. If a coaxial cable is used for field strength measurement, the coaxial
cable loss needs to be compensated through the correction function. The antenna coefficient can beentered by editing the antenna control under the field strength menu or loading the antenna control to
input the antenna coefficient of the antenna used. Field strength measurement is supported in allmeasurement items (except IQ Acq, CCDF, and Harmonic) in sa mode.
When the field strength function is turned on, the amplitude unit will switch to dBuV/m and the Y-axis
unit options under the amplitude menu will change. The optional field strength unit type is:1) E Electric field intensity units: dBuV/m, V/m, dBuA/m.
2) P Power density unit: dBm/m^2, W/cm^2, W/m^2.
3) H magnetic flux units: dBG, dBpT.

3.6.1

Field Str

When the field strength switch is turned on, the amplitude selectable display switches to field strength
units. Display items affected by the amplitude unit: Ref Level, Marker, Freq Counter, Y-axis numericaldisplay, Noise Marker, Delta Mkr.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength[:STATe][:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set field strength switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:FIELd:STRength 1:FIELd:STRength?

3.6.2

Edit Antenna

Antenna coefficient data can be loaded or saved through a file with the suffix .corr (the same suffix as
the Corrections function file). The relevant SCPI commands for antenna coefficient editing are shown
below.
Command Format

34[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:DATA {x1,y1 }[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:DATA?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Illustration

Get/Set antenna points

Parameter Type

Character String of antenna Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dB/m, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dB/m, ……}Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Field Strength>Edit Antenna

example:FIELd:STRength:DATA 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:FIELd:STRength:DATA 10000000,-15

Command Format[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:ADD {x1,y1 }Illustration

Add antenna Point

Parameter Type

Character String of antenna Data {Freq 1Hz, Amp 1dBm, Freq 2Hz, Amp
2dBm, ……}

Parameter Range
Menu

Input/Output>Field Strength>Edit Antenna

example:FIELd:STRength:ADD 10000000,-15, 15000000, -15:FIELd:STRength:ADD10000000,15

Command Format[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:POINt:DELete

Illustration

Delete a special antenna point.

Parameter Type

Serial Number

Menu

Input/Output>Field Strength>Edit Antenna

example:FIELd:STRength:POINt:DELete 0

Command Format[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:DELete

Illustration

Delete all correction points

Parameter Type

Serial Number

Menu

Input/Output>Field Strength>Edit Antenna

example:FIELd:STRength:DELete

3.6.3

View Antenna

If View Antenna is ON, the antenna coefficient curve will be displayed in the waveform area.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:ANTenna[:SENSe]:FIELd:STRength:ANTenna?

Instructions

Set the display field strength antenna curve

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:FIELd:STRength:ANTenna 1:FIELd:STRength:ANTenna?

www.siglent.com

35

SHA850A User Manual36

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.7

Trigger

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger functions, users can choose from the trigger menu.

3.7.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different trigger requirements.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default mode of the analyzer, in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps circularly andcontinuously.
Video
When the user wants to capture an instantaneous signal that appears for a very short time, the video
trigger mode can be adopted . In this working mode, only when the rising edge or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen.
External
External trigger provides users with richer trigger functions. If users want to realize the periodic trigger
and delay trigger spectrum analyzer, they can choose the external trigger mode. In this mode, it istriggered by the rising or falling edge of the external input signal. The square wave signal with acertain frequencycan be periodically triggered, and the delay time can be adjusted by setting the
Trigger Delay option.
Periodic
When Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as the trigger. The trigger
event is set by the periodic timer parameter, which is modified by offset and periodic synchronization
Src.
You can synchronize periodic signals with external events (using periodic synchronization Src) to getcloser to a reliable trigger signal.
If the synchronization source is not selected (off state), the internal timer will not synchronize with any
external timed events.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

3.7.2

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level for the video trigger (absolute level only supported). When the video signal

www.siglent.com

37

SHA850A User Manualcrosses the voltage level with the selected slope, it is triggered.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-300 dBm ~50 dBm

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

3.7.3

Trigger Slope

Set the trigger polarity for external trigger, video trigger. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.
The same trigger source uses the same trigger edge for both gating and triggering.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

3.7.4

Trigger Delay

When scanning is at zero span, negative delay can be set . The time range of negative delay is related
to the number of sweep points and sweep time:
Maximum negative delay time = [ 496M / ( sweep points * 64 ) - 5] * sweep time
Maximum positive delay time =500ms

38

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay
gets the trigger delay{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

Float

ReturnFloat

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay state.
gets the trigger delay state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal: DELay:STATe 1

3.7.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (external trigger only)

In normal cases, after the trigger is generated, the data is displayed and the data is triggered at thesame time. However, the processing time of the trigger path and the data path is different. As a result,the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affect the integrity of the data
and does not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it is necessary to display
the zero point of screen coordinate as the input signal information of trigger point, so the function ofzero span delay compensation is needed.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF|ON|0|1:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation?

Instructions

Enable /disable the external trigger zero sweep delay compensation

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation OFF

3.7.6

Period (periodic trigger only)

Set the trigger period. For gating and triggering, the same trigger source uses the same trigger cycle.
Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

www.siglent.com

39

SHA850A User Manual

3.7.7

Offset Time

Adjust the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and trigger events. The periodic trigger
clock cannot be viewed on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. Therefore, in order toadjust the trigger event time, only the offset between the periodic triggering clock and the triggering
event can be adjusted. However, the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, and each
modification of the offset is cumulative on the previous basis.

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

3.7.8

Reset Time Offset Display

Reset the display of cycle trigger time offset.
Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

3.7.9

Sync Source (periodic trigger only)

Figure 3-1 Trigger of synchronization source

40

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

3.7.10Gate Source

Select a gate source for gate measurement. The optional sources are external source and periodic
source.
External
Set the trigger source of the gate to be an external source. Similar to trigger, when configuringexternal sources, you can choose whether to trigger on the rising edge or the falling edge, andconfigure zero span delay compensation. The configuration of the gating source affects theconfiguration of the trigger source.

PeriodSet the trigger source of the gate to a periodic source. Similar to trigger, you can configure trigger
period, trigger offset, and trigger period synchronization sources when configuring periodic sources.
The configuration of the gating source affects the configuration of the trigger source.

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce?

Instructions

Set or query the gate source type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range" EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"EXT","FRAMe"

Example:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce EXT

3.7.11Gate

The gate is to separate the spectrum information of some signals that occupy the same part in thefrequency domain but are separated from each other in the time domain, such as time divisionmultiple access signals.
3.7.11.1 Gate On
Turn on or off the gate function. When this function is enabled, the gate settings view is closed
Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe][:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set or query the gate switch

www.siglent.com

41

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:EGATe 1

3.7.11.2 Gate Method
Configure the gate method.
⚫

LO gate: In this gate mode, the sweep does not start immediately, but detects the trigger of thegate source first. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate signal is determined according to
the gate delay and gate width.
When the gate signal is high, the sweep begins. When the gate signal is low, sweep stops. Whenthe next gate trigger occurs, continue as before until the specified bandwidth has been swept.
In zero span mode, data is collected only when the gate is open, so the setting of the gate willaffect the actual sweep time, even though there is no actual sweep process.

⚫

FFT gate: In this gate mode, the sweep does not start immediately, but detects the trigger of thegating source first. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate signal is determined according to
the gate delay and gate width.
When the gate signal is high, sweep starts, data is collected and FFT transformation is carried out.
Since the data processed by FFT needs to be continuous, the gate can be low only after FFTtransformation is completed, which is also why the gate length of FFT is a fixed value.
The gate length of FFT needs to be larger than the data length required to complete FFT. WhenFFT completes a spectrum calculation, the gate will be lower. Then wait for the generation of thenext gate trigger and repeat the previous action until the specified bandwidth is swept. FFT gate
is unavailable in zero span mode.

⚫

Video gate: In this gate mode, after entering the sweep mode, it starts immediately and detects
the trigger of the gate source at the same time. After the trigger of the gate source, the gate signal
is determined according to the gate delay and the gate width.
When the gate signal is low, the output data is a constant value; when the gate signal is high, thespectrum swept at this time is output. The video trigger does not affect the sweep process, butdisplays the spectrum of the gate signal at the high moment, and a fixed value at other moments.
With this gate mode, it is usually necessary to set the sweep time to a long time so that the gate
signal appears at least once in each display point, thus ensuring that the detector can obtain thereal data in the corresponding time interval when the detect mode is peak detect.

42

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate method

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF","LO","VIDeo","FFT"Return"OFF","LO","VIDeo","FFT"Example:SWEep:EGATe:METHod FFT

3.7.11.3 Gate Length
Set the gate length.This parameter cannot be changed when FFT gate.
The relationship between RBW and gate length in FFT gate mode

RBW

gate length (us)1Hz24980643Hz

82836810Hz

272348

30Hz

86968

100Hz

27807

300Hz

10323

1000Hz5447

3000Hz2333

10000Hz

1117

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate length

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

2.106us~5s

Return

Float

Example:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth 1s

3.7.11.4 Gate Delay
Configure the delay between gate trigger and gate on.
Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay?

Instructions

Set or query the gate delay

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

Swept : 8.906us~25s
Zero span : 1.894us~25s

Return

Float

ExampleSWEep:EGATe:DELay 0.005s

www.siglent.com

43

SHA850A User Manual

3.7.11.5 Gate View
When Turn on this view:⚫

Disable the gate on/off and the gate function.

⚫

To enter the zero span mode, set different Gate View Sweep Time based on different gate
methods.When you close the gate view, the sweep span and sweep time before the gate view isenabled are restored.

Gate View Sweep Time
Controls the sweep time in the gate view window. When selecting different gate methods, theinstrument will automatically configure different sweep time.

Gate View Start Time
Set the start time on the left of the gate view, that is, set a delay.

44

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW?

Instructions

Set or query the gate view switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW 1

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate View start time

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt 1s

Command format[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME?

Instructions

Set/Query the gate View time

Parameter Type

Float

Return

Float

Example[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:TIME 1s

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.8

Trace

Figure 3-2 trace selectThe sweep signal is displayed as a trace on the screen.
Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6 [:DATA]?

Instructions

Get trace data

ReturnStringExample:TRACe:DATA?

Command format:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]ASCii|REAL32| REAL:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the format of trace data read

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASCii
REAL32 Floating 32 bit
REAL Floating 64 bit

ReturnEnumeration : ASCii|REAL| REAL32

Example:FORMat ASCii

3.8.1

Select Trace

The analyzer allows for up to four traces to be displayed at the same time. Each trace has its own
color (Trace A - Yellow, Trace B - Purple, Trace C - Light blue and Trace D - Green). All traces can be
set parameter independently. As a default, analyzer will choose Trace A and set the type of the traceas Clear Write.
Command format

TRACe:SELEct
TRACe:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/gets the current trace

Parameter Type

EnumerationTRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration : TRACE1-6

ExampleTRACe:SELEct TRACE3

www.siglent.com

45

SHA850A User Manual

3.8.2

Trace TypeSet the type of the current trace or disable it. The system calculates the sampled data using a specificoperation method according to the trace type selected and displays the result. Trace types include
Clear Write, Max Hold, Min Hold, View, Average and Blank. The corresponding icon of the trace typewill be displayed in the status bar at the left of the screen, as shown in the figure below.
Clear Write
Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data sampled in real-time ofeach point on the trace.
Max Hold
Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new maximum
level is detected in successive sweeps. Max Hold is very effective when measuring events that may
take successive scans to measure accurately. Some common applications include FM Deviation, AM
NRSC, and frequency hopping or drift.
Min Hold
Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update the data if a
new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.
Average
Set the averages times of the selected trace.
More averages can reduce the noise and the influence of other random signals; thus highlighting thestable signal characteristics. The larger the averages times is, the smoother the trace will be. Enabling
averaging will take more time to collect the full spectral information because the analyzer needs tosweep the set average count. The displayed data is averaged in a first-in-first-out fashion.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE WRITe|MAXHold|MINHold| AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display type of trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

WRITe : Trace is in normal mode. Update data
MAXHold : Displays the maximum value of traces
MINHold : Displays the minimum value of trace
AVERage : Displays the average value of trace

ReturnEnumeration : WRITE|MAXH|MINH| AVER

Example:TRAC1:TYPE MINH

3.8.3

Trace State

There are four trace states: active, view, blank, and background. Different trace states indicate therefresh and display states of traces:
ActiveRefreshed and displayed trace data.
46

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

View
The trace data will not be refreshed, and the current latest trace will be displayed in a fixed frame.
Blank
Trace data is no longer refreshed or displayed
Background
Refreshed trace data but no display.

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the display status of the trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration : ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKParameter Range

ACTIve : Trace is in normal mode. Update data
VIEW : Stops updating trace to display current trace data
BLANk : Clear trace data
BACKground : Set as background

ReturnEnumeration : ACTI|VIEW|BLAN| BACKExample:TRACe2:DISPlay BLANK:TRACe2:DISPlay?

3.8.4

Detect

The analyzer displays the sweep signal on the screen in the form of a trace. For each trace point, theanalyzer always captures all the data within a specific time interval and processes (Peak, Average,etc.) the data using the detector currently selected, then it displays the processed data (a single data
point) on the screen.
Select an appropriate detector type according to the actual application in order to ensure the accuracyof the measurement.
The available types are Pos Peak, Neg Peak, Sample, Normal, Average and Quasi Peak. The
default is Pos peak.
Positive PeakFor each trace point, Positive Peak detector displays the maximum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
Negative PeakFor each trace point, Negative Peak detector displays the minimum value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.
SampleFor each trace point, Sample detector displays the transient level corresponding to the central time
point of the corresponding time interval. This detector type is applicable to noise or noise-like signal.
Normalwww.siglent.com

47

SHA850A User Manual

Normal detector (also called ROSENFELL Detector) displays the maximum value and the minimum
value of the sample data segment in turn: Odd-numbered data points display the maximum value andeven-numbered data points display the minimum value. In this way, the amplitude variation range ofthe signal is clearly shown.
Average
For each trace point, Average detector displays the average value of data sampled within thecorresponding time interval.

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion]?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the trace detection type

Parameter Type

Enumeration NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Parameter Range

NORMAL : standard
NEGative : Negative peak
POSitive : positive peak
SAMPle : The sampling
AVERage : average,

ReturnEnumeration : NEG|POS|SAMP|AVER|NORMAL

Example:DETector:TRAC1 AVERage

Command format[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO 0|1[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO?
[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

Instructions

Set/get trace automatic detection switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DETector:TRACe3:AUTO 1:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL

3.8.5

Math

Set the computational method of the math trace.
Output Z
The Math result is denoted by the Z variable and can be displayed by trace
Input X, Y
Input X, Y can be applied to trace
Calculation TypeThe analyzer provides the calculation types as shown below:
Power Diff : X-Y+Offset→ZPower Sum : X+Y+Offset→Z48

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual
Log Offset : X+ Offset→Z
Log Diff : X-Y-Ref→Z
Offset value
Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6MATH:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the x-trace of the variable

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe3:MATH:X 5

Command format:TRACe:MATH:Y [1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:MATH:Y?

Instructions

Set the variable Y trace
Get the variable y-trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACE1-6

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe1:MATH:Y 3

Command format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion?

Instructions

Sets/gets the trace calculation type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
PDIF : Power subtracting
PSUM : Power up
LOFF : Logarithmic deviation
LDIF : Logarithmic subtraction

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MATH:FUNCtion PDIF

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set the LOG OFFSET constant
Ask for the LOG OFFSET constantParameter Type

IntegerParameter Range-100dB-100dB

Return-100dB-100dB

Example:TRACe1:MATH:OFFSet -10:TRACe3:MATH:OFFSet?

Command format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/gets the LOG DIFF constantwww.siglent.com

49

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range-100dB-100dB

Return-100dB-100dB

Example:TRACe5:MATH:REFerence 10:TRACe6:MATH:REFerence?

3.8.6

Normalize

Trace normalization function. Please save the reference trace before using this function.

50

Command format:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF

Instructions

Set normalization to save the reference trace

Example:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF

Command format:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe] OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set/read switch normalization

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:NTData 1

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel?

Instructions

Sets/gets the normalized reference level

Parameter Type

Float , unitdB

Parameter Range-200 dB ~ 200 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:NRLevel 10

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition?

Instructions

Sets/reads the normalized reference location

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:NRPosition 10

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the normalized reference trace switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace 1

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.8.7

Trace Function

Trace function supports the following operations on the specified trace
Trace Copy
Copy data from the source trace to the destination trace. After copying, the trace state of the target
trace is automatically changed to view.
Trace Exchange
Exchange the data of the source trace with the data of the target trace. After the exchange, the trace
status of the source trace and the target trace will be automatically changed to view.
Preset All Traces
The settings and data of all traces are changed to the default state.
Clear All Traces
Clear all traces data.

3.9

Command format:TRACe:COPY

Instructions

Copy the trace

Example:TRACe:COPY 1,2

Command format:TRACe:EXCHange

Instructions

Exchange of trace

Example:TRACe:EXCHange 1,2Command format:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Instructions

Reset all traces

Example:TRACe:PRESet:ALL

Command format:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

Instructions

Clear all traces

Example:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

Marker & Peak

The marker appears as a rhombic sign (as shown below) for identifying points on a trace. You caneasily read the amplitude, frequency and sweep time of the marked point on the trace.
⚫

The analyzer allows for up to eight/four pairs of markers to be displayed at one time, but only one
pair or a single marker is active every time.

⚫

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify the desired frequency or time aswell as view the readouts of different points on the trace.

www.siglent.com

51

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.1

Select Marker

Select one of the eight markers. The default is Marker1. When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be marked, readout type and other related parameters. The enabled marker will appear
on the trace selected through the Select Trace option and the readouts of this marker are also
displayed in the active function area and at the upper right corner of the screen.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the current marker

Parameter Type

Enumeration1-8

ReturnEnumeration : 1-8

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

3.9.2

Select Trace

Select the trace to be marked by the current marker. Valid selections includeTrace1,2,3,4,5,6.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|3|4|5|6:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6

ReturnEnumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

3.9.3

Marker Type3.9.3.1 Normal
One of the marker types. It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) values ofa certain point on the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (such as“ 1 ”) appears on the trace.
⚫

If no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center frequencyof the current trace.

⚫

You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to move the marker. The readouts of themarker will be displayed at the upper right corner of the screen.

⚫

The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher readout
resolution, reduce the span.

3.9.3.2 Delta
One of the marker types. It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y(Amplitude) between the reference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair of52

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

markers appears on the trace: Fixed Related Marker (marked by a combination of the marker number
and letter “ + ”, such as “ 2+ ”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “∆”, such as “ 1∆2 ”).
⚫

After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker,
and the related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed”
marker⚫

The delta marker is in the "relative to" state, and its X-axis position can be changed; the related
marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis positions are fixed), but the X-axis
can be adjusted by changing to the "normal" state.

⚫

The first row in the upper right corner of the trace area shows the frequency (or time) difference
and amplitude difference between the two markers; the second row in the upper right corner of
the trace area shows the X axis and amplitude value of the related marker.

⚫

Delta reset. It is only valid when the current marker is a differential marker. If the marker type ofthe relative marker of the current marker is normal or differential, change the horizontal position of
the relative marker to the horizontal position of the current marker; if the marker type of therelative marker is fixed, change the horizontal position and vertical position of the relative marker
to the current one. The horizontal and vertical position of the marker.

3.9.3.3 Fixed
One of the marker types. When “Fixed” is selected, the X-axis and Y-axis of the marker will notchange by the trace and can only be changed through the menu. The fixed marker is marked with "+".
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

3.9.3.4 Off
Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE POSition|DELTa|FIXed|OFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:MODE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
FIXed
OFF

ReturnEnumeration : POS|DELT|FIX|OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker switch status

Parameter Type

Booleanwww.siglent.com

53

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instructions

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 [:SET]:RESEt:DELTa

Instructions

Difference marker resets to 0
Only valid when the current cursor is a differential marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RESEt:DELTa

3.9.4

Marker Postion

Displays and sets the position of the marker. Only the x-axis position can be set.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker point X axis
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is not OFF：:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
If the marker readout type is frequency, the parameter is frequency.
When the marker readout type is time, the value is time. Reference
commands::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout

54

Parameter Typefrequency , Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz , default Hzor time , Float , unitus , ms , s , ks , default s

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ max span or 10 ms ~ 1000 s

ReturnWhen the marker readout type is frequency, the reading is frequency, floating
point type, in Hz;
When the marker readout type is time, the reading is time, floating point type, in s;
When the marker readout type is cycle, the reading is cycle, floating point type,
unit s;Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instructions

Read the value of the Y-axis of the marker point, which can also be used to readthe marker noise in the marker function.
To execute this command, ensure that the marker is in the
onstate.:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return : -25

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) between
two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence 1|2|3|4:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the marker relative toParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:REFerence 3

3.9.6

Readout Type

Select a desired readout type for the X-axis for the marker. Different markers can use different readout
types. This setting will change the readout type and affect the marker readings in the active function
area and at the upper right corner of the screen, but will not change the actual value.

Frequency
In this type, Normal marker shows the absolute frequency. Delta markers and Delta Pair markers
show the frequency difference between the delta marker and reference marker. The default readout
mode in non-zero span is “Frequency”.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.

PeriodIn this type, the Normal marker shows the reciprocal of frequency; while Delta marker and Delta Pairmarker show the reciprocal of frequency difference. When the frequency difference is zero, thereciprocal is infinite and 100 Ts is displayed.
Note: This type is invalid in Zero span.

Time
In this type, the Normal marker shows the time difference between the marker and the start of thesweep; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker show the sweep time difference between the deltamarker and reference marker.
The default readout mode in Zero span is Time.

www.siglent.com

55

SHA850A User Manual

Inverse TimeIn this type, the Normal marker Inverse Time = 1 / Time; while Delta marker and Delta Pair marker s
Inverse Time = 1 / Δ Time.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout
FREQuency | TIME | PERiod | INTIme:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FREQuency , frequency
TIME
PERiodINVERSE_TIME

ReturnEnumeration: FREQ|TIME|PER| INTIme

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout FREQuency

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker in X-axis reading mode auto

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:X:READout:AUTO 1

3.9.7

Marker Couple

When Marker Couple is on, Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces.
When Marker Couple is off, Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace.
Command format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instructions

Set/query the marker coupling switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle 1:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle?

3.9.8

Marker Lines

Mark the marker with the intersection of horizontal and vertical lines, which is more convenient toquery the marker position in the waveform area.

56

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker line switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe 1:CALCulate:MARKer2:X:LINE:STATe?

3.9.9

Marker Table

Enable or disable the Marker Table.
Display all the markers enabled on the lower portion of the screen, including marker number, trace
number, marker readout type, X-axis readout and amplitude. Through this table you can view themeasurement values of multiple points. The table allows for up to eight markers to be displayed at one
time.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker table stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe ON

3.9.10Marker ->3.9.10.1 M->CF
Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.

⚫

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency will be set to the frequency of
the Delta Marker.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the center frequency .If the marker is
not open, this command automatically turns the marker on the center frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CENTer

www.siglent.com

57

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.10.2 M -> CF Step
Set the center frequency step of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to the frequency of thecurrent marker.

⚫

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the center frequency step will be set to the frequencyof the Delta Marker.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STEP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to mid-frequency step
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on thecenter frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STEP

3.9.10.3 M -> Start Freq
Set the start frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.

⚫

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the start frequency will be set to the frequency of the
Delta Marker.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to the starting frequency, valid when themarker is on

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:START

3.9.10.4 M -> Stop Freq
Set the stop frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of the current
marker.

⚫

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the stop frequency will be set to the frequency of the
Delta Marker.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.

58

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker X axis to terminate frequency
If the corresponding marker is not open, sending this command will automatically
open the marker at the end frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STOP

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.10.5 M ->Ref Level
Set the reference level of the analyzer to the amplitude of the current marker.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of the current
marker.

⚫

If the Delta or Delta Pair marker is selected, the reference level will be set to the amplitude of the
Delta Marker.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RLEVel

Instructions

Sets/gets the value of the marker Y-axis as a reference level
If the marker is not open, this command automatically turns the marker on thecenter frequency.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:RLEVel

3.9.10.6 ΔM->Span
Set the span of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in Delta marker
type.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to sweep widthThis command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Example:CALCulate:MARKer2:DELTa:SPAN

3.9.10.7 ΔM->CF
Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency difference between the two markers in Delta
marker type.
⚫

If the Normal marker is selected, this function is invalid.

⚫

The function is invalid in Zero span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Sets/gets the difference between the marker and the X axis to the center
frequency
This command takes effect only when the marker mode is DELTa:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Example:CALCulate:MARKer3:DELTa:CENTer

3.9.11Marker Fn

Special marker functions including Noise Marker, N dB BW and Freq Counter.
Command format

www.siglent.com:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion OFF|FCOunt|NOISe|NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion?

59

SHA850A User Manual

Instructions

Set/Get marker function

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF : normal
NOISe : noisy marker
NDB : N dB marker

ReturnEnumeration: OFF|NOISe|NDB

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FUNCtion NOISe

3.9.11.1 N dB BW
Enable the N dB BW measurement or set the value of N dB. The N dB BW denotes the frequency
difference between two points that are located on both sides of the current marker and with N dB fall
(N Less than or equal to 0) or rise (N>0) in amplitude as shown in the figure on the next page.

When the measurement starts, the analyzer will search for the two points which are located at bothsides of the current point with N dB fall or rise in amplitude and display the frequency difference
between the two points in the active function area. "----" would be displayed if the search fails.
The parameters in the figure are shown as :Figure 3-3 N dB parameter

mkr_ndb_bw

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the N dB bandwidth reference value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:NDB 10 DB

60

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?

Instructions

Result of setting/reading N dB bandwidth

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:RESult?

3.9.11.2 Freq Counter
Turn on or off the frequency counter. The frequency readout is accuracy is up to 0.01 Hz.
⚫

The function is valid only when selecting marker 1.

⚫

If marker 1 is selected but not active, turning on the frequency counter will open marker 1 Normal
marker automatically.

⚫

The frequency counter measures the frequency near the center frequency in Zero span.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe] ON|OFF|0|1:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:[:STATe]?

Instructions

Sets/gets the marker frequency counter stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt 1

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:X?

Instructions

Read the marker frequency counter reading

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:FCOunt:X?

3.9.11.3 Noise Marker
Execute the Noise marker function for the selected marker and read the normalized noise power
spectral density.
⚫

If the current marker is “ Off ” in the Marker menu, pressing Noise Marker will first set it to Normal
type automatically; then measure the average noise level at the marked point and normalize thisvalue to 1 Hz bandwidth. During this process, certain compensation is always made based on thedetection and trace types. The measurement will be more precise if RMS Avg or Sample
detection type is used.

⚫

This function can be used for measuring the C/N ratio.

3.9.11.4 Off
Turn off the noise marker, N dB BW measurement or Frequency Counter, but not the marker itself.

www.siglent.com

61

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.12

Peak Search

Open the peak search setting menu and execute peak search.
3.9.12.1 Peak Search
Next Search
Execute peak search and mark the peak.
Minium PeakExecute minimum search and mark the minium peak.
Next Peak
Search for and mark the peak whose amplitude is closest to that of the current peak and which meetsthe peak search condition.
Next Left Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the left side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.
Next Right Peak
Search for and mark the nearest peak which is located at the right side of the current peak and meetsthe peak search condition.
Peak PeakExecute peak search and minimum search at the same time and mark the results with delta pairmarkers. Wherein, the result of peak search is marked with the delta marker and the result of
minimum search is marked with the reference marker.
Peak -> CF
Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the peak.The
function is invalid in Zero Span.

62

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instructions

Marker searches for peaks and marks them with the specified marker(If peak-to-peak value is on, peak-to-peak value search is carried out; otherwise,
single peak value search is carried out, refer to thecommand:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:STATe
Search criteria include peak type, absolute threshold, and relative offset:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum

Instructions

Marker searches for the minimum peak and marks it with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MINimum

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT

Instructions

Marker searches for the next peak and marks it with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following
command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:NEXT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt

Instructions

Marker searches for left/right peaks and marks with the specified marker(Based on the set search criteria, including peak type, absolute threshold, andrelative offset, see the following command:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion)

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:LEFT

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak

Instructions

Performs a peak-to-peak search, marking with the specified marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:PTPeak

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum[:SET]:CENTer

Instructions

Execute peak search and set the center frequency of the analyzer to thefrequency of the peak

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:MAXimum:CENTer

3.9.12.2 Peak Config
Define the conditions of peak search for various peak searches. A real peak should meet therequirements of both the “Peak Threshold” and “Peak Excursion”.
Peak Threshold
Assign a minimum for the peak amplitude. Peaks whose amplitudes are greater than the specified
peak threshold are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peak threshold is -200dBm when shut
down the Peak Threshold.
Peak Excursion
Set the excursion between the peak and the minimum amplitude on both sides of it. Peaks whose
excursions are beyond the specified excursion are treated as real peaks.The actual minimal peakexcursion is 0dBm when shut down the Peak Excursion.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold?

Instructions

Sets/gets the absolute threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdBm

www.siglent.com

63

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range-200.0 dBm~ 200.0 dBm

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe?

Instructions

Set or obtain the absolute threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion?

Instructions

Sets/gets a relative threshold for the peak search criteria

Parameter Type

Float , unitdB

Parameter Range

0 ~ 200.0 dB

ReturnFloat , unitdB

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion 10

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe?

Instructions

Set and obtain the relative threshold switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe ON-50

3.9.12.3 Count Peak
Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will always
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

64

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instructions

Enable the continuous peak search function
Gets the status of the continuous peak search function switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.9.12.4 Peak Table
Open the peak table (in the lower window) which lists the peaks (with frequency and amplitude) thatmeet the peak search condition. Up to 30 peaks can be displayed in the table.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe ON

Command format:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

Instructions

Get peak table data

ReturnStringExample:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?

3.9.12.5 Sort Order
Sort all signals in the peak table by the specific order.
Sort order based on the frequency / time (zero span) , ampt or delta to limit.
Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

Instructions

Sets/gets the peak sorting basis

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
Return

AMPT|FREQ|DELTa
AMPT|FREQ|DELTa

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT FREQ:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the peak sort type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range
ReturnASC|DEC
ASC|DEC

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr DEC:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDEr?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Instructions

Peak sorting based on limit selection

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1-6

www.siglent.com

65

SHA850A User Manual

Return

1-6

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit 5:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit?

Command format:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe 0|1:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe?

Instructions

Set/Query the switch of the peak value table

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe ON

3.10 Limit
The analyzer supports Pass/Fail test function. In this function, the measured curve will be comparedwith the pre-edited curve. If the related rules are met, the result is “Pass”, else the result is “Fail”.

3.10.1

Limit State

Enable or disable slected limit.
Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:STATe OFF

3.10.2

Limit Margin

Set the margin for selected limit.
When trace is between limit and margin, it will be displayed as Fail Margin.

66

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin?

Instructions

Sets/gets the limit margin value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100 dB ~ 100dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin 10:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin?
:CALCulate:LLINe2:MARGin:STATe 0

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted state

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:MARGin:STATe OFF

3.10.3

Limit TypeSet the limit type as upper / lower. The limit 1,3,5 is default as the lower and 2,4,6 as the lower
Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE UPPer|LOWer:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE?

Instructions

Sets/Gets the restriction type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

ReturnEnumeration

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TYPE LOWer

3.10.4

Limit Edit

Edit the properties of selected limit.

Figure 3-4 limit edit

Table 3-1 Limit1 Edit Menu
Function

Explanation

Type

Select upper or lower limit type. The default value is Upper.

Mode

Select limit line or limit point. The default value is Line.
Set the number of the point to be edited if you selected the point type,
and the range is 1 ~ 100.

www.siglent.com

67

SHA850A User Manual68

Add point

Add a new point for editing.

X-axisEdit the X-axis value (frequency or time) of the current point.

Amplitude

Edit the amplitude of the current point or line.

Del Point

Delete the point whose number is selected in Mode.

Del All

Delete all the points.

Save/Load

Save or load the limit file.

X OffsetSet offsets of X axis.

Y OffsetSet offsets of Y axis

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X?

Instructions

Set the limit point template frequency offset
Gets the limit point template frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0 ~ 26.5G

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X 1MHz

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y?

Instructions

Sets the limit point template amplitude offset
Gets the limiter template amplitude offset

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-350 dB~380 dB

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe5:Offset:Y -10

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA?

Instructions

Sets/gets restricted data
(Clears previous data)

Parameter Typeval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Returnval1 : frequency : Float,
val2 : Ampl : Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:DATA 100,-20,200,-25 (add two points (100 , -20) and(200 , -25 ) ):CALC:LLINe1:DATA?

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete

Instructions

Add limit point
Delete limit points

Parameter Typeval1 : frequency : Float,www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manualval2 : Ampl : Float
Parameter Range

val1 : related with Spanval2 : -400 dBm~330 dBm

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:ADD 100,-20:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:DELete 2

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Instructions

Delete specified restrictions
Delete all restrictions

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe?

Instructions

Select the limit trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:TRACe 3

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the frequency difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe?

Instructions

Set or query the frequency reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FREQuency:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the range difference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOG|LIN

Return

LOG|LIN

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE LOG

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6: AMPLitude:CMODe?

www.siglent.com

69

SHA850A User Manual

Instructions

Set or query the amplitude reference type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

FIXed|RELAtive

ReturnFIXed|RELAtive

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: AMPLitude:CMODe FIX

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY?

Instructions

Copy the limit

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:COPY 5

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd?

Instructions

Fitting a trace

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~6

Return

1~6

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd 1:CALCulate:LLINe2: BUILd?

3.10.5

Limit Test

Enable or disable the limit test function.

Figure 3-5 test results

70

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instructions

Sets/gets the status of the test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST 1

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

Instructions

Query limit test results.

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL 1

3.10.6

Setup

Fail to stop
Turn on or off the Fail to stop function. If the function is on, the analyzer will stop sweep and retain thetest result when the test result is “Fail”.
BuzzerTurn on or off the buzzer. When the buzzer is on, it beeps when the test result is “Fail”.

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instructions

Sets/gets the restricted buzzer

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

Command format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instructions

The set/query limit test stops if it fails

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

3.11 Meas & Meas Setup
Provide optional measurement functions. When activated, the screen will be divided into two parts.
The above part is the measure screen which displays traces, and the other part is used to display
measurement results.

www.siglent.com

71

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.1

Swept SAThe Swept SA measurement lets you perform “traditional” Spectrum Analysis, that is, Swept and Zero
Span measurements, as well as “Swept FFT” analysis (FFT analysis presented as though it were
swept).
3.11.1.1 Average TypeChoose one of the following averaging types: log power (video), power (RMS), or voltage averaging.
When trace average is on, the average type is shown on the left side of the display.

Figure 3-6 Average Type⚫

Log Power
Select the logarithmic (decibel) scale for all filtering and averaging processes. This scale is"Video" because it is the most common display and analysis scale for the video signal within
analyzer. This scale is excellent for finding Sine/CW signals near noise.

⚫

Power Average
In this average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the power (the square of themagnitude) of the signal, instead of its log or envelope voltage. This scale is best for real-time
power measurement of complex signals.

⚫

Voltage Average
In this Average type, all filtering and averaging processes work on the voltage of the envelope ofthe signal. This scale is suitable for observing rise and fall behavior of AM or pulse-modulated
signals such as radar and TDMA transmitters.

72

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Query the average type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

LOGPower
POWer
VOLTage

ReturnEnumeration : LOGP|POW|VOLT

ExampleAVERage:TYPE VOLTagewww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 0|1|ON|OFF[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO?

Instructions

Set/query the average type automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:AVERage:TYPE:AUTO 1

3.11.1.2 Average/Hold Number
Sets the terminal count number N for Average, Max Hold and Min Hold trace types.This number is an
integral part of how the average trace is calculated. Basically,increasing N results in a smootheraverage trace.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average number of traces

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 999

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:TRACe1:COUNt 10

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6?
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CLEar

Instructions

The current average number of times the trace has been obtained
Restart average

Example:AVERage:TRACe2 ?
:AVERage:TRACe2:CLEar

3.11.1.3 Tune & Radio⚫

Demod(AM/FM)
Sets the demodulation type of AM,FM or OFF demod. Default setting is OFF demod.
When AM(or FM) demodulation is turned on, the system automatically opens a cursor to position
it at the center frequency, and perform AM (or FM) demodulation for this frequency point.
This machine is equipped with a headphone jack, through which demodulation signal can be
output in audio mode. Audio frequency represents the frequency of the modulated signal, and theintensity of audio indicates the amplitude of the modulated signal.

⚫

EarphoneSet the headset status/volume.When the headset is turned on, the voice of the modulation signal
can be heard through the headset during the demodulation process. The headset is disabled bydefault.You can set the volume of the headset by volume.

⚫

Demodulation timewww.siglent.com

73

SHA850A User Manual

Set the dwell time of signal demodulation after each sweep. Longer dwell time will benefit
continuous demodulation signal.
If the headset is turned on, the voice of the demodulated signal will be heard through the headset
during this period.

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod AM|FM|OFF[:SENSe]:DEMod?

Instructions

Sets the demodulation mode
Gets the demodulation mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

AM : Amplitude modulation
FM : Frequency modulation
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: AM|FM|OFF

Example:DEMod AM

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone?

Instructions

Switch the headset

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DEMod:EPHone ON

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume?

Instructions

Adjust the volume

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:DEMod:VOLume 10

Command format[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME?

Instructions

Set the demodulation time
Get demodulation time

Parameter type

Float , unitms , us , sParameter Range

5 ms ~1000 s

ReturnFloat , units

ExampleDEMod:TIME 5 ms

3.11.1.4 Automatic coupling
Auto coupling instantly sets all auto/manual functions to auto. The automatic coupling action is limited
to the current measurement. It does not affect other measurements in the mode.
In the automatic state, the automatic/manual functions are referred to as "coupled", which means that74

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

their values will change based on changes made to other values in the measurement. This helps
ensure accurate measurements and optimal dynamic range. Automatic coupling is a just-in-time
action feature that, when it is performed, all automatic/manual controls for the current measurement
are set to automatic and all measurement settings coupled to automatic/manual parameters areautomatically set to their best values.
Command format:COUPle:ALL

Instructions

Automatic coupling

Example:COUPle:ALL

3.11.1.5 Display line
The amplitude line can be used as a reference for the amplitude readout or as a threshold condition
for the peak display in the peak table.
The frequency line can be used as a reference for frequency readout.
Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe?

Instructions

Sets/gets the amplitude display line

Parameter type

Float

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe -40

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?

Instructions

Set/get amplitude display line automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe 1

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the frequency display line

Parameter type

Float

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe 100e6

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe?

Instructions

Set/get frequency display line automatically

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe 1

www.siglent.com

75

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.1.6 Gloabl
The global center frequency causes the current center frequency to act on other measurements /swep.
Command format:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Enable/disable the global center frequency

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer 0:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer?

3.11.1.7 Source
There are two Source type:CW:
CW Freq: Set the Independent source frequency, which synchronizes the SA receiver's center
frequency setting, so the signal is displayed in the center of the screen;
CW Level: Enter a number from -40 dBm to 0 dBm. The source power is displayed flat over thefrequency range.
CW offset:
Offset to CF : The distance the signal is offset by IF;
CW Offset Level : Signal peak amplitude offset.

76

Command format[:SENSe]:SOURce:STATe 0|1|ON|OFF[:SENSe]:SOURce:STATe?

Instructions
Parameter type
Parameter Range
ReturnSet/Query the source state
Boolean
OFF|ON|0|1
0|1

Example:SOURce:STATe 0:SOURce:STATe ?

Command format[:SENSe] :SOURce:TYPE CW[:SENSe] :SOURce:TYPE?

Instructions
Parameter type
Parameter Range
ReturnSet/Query the source type
Enumeration
CW|CWC
Enumeration CW|CWC

Example:SOURce:TYPE CW:SOURce:TYPE?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:SOURce:CW:FREQuency[:SENSe]:SOURce:CW:FREQuency?

Instructions

Sets the CW FREQ
Gets the CW FREQ

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

100KHz~7.5GHz

Return

Float

Example:SOURce:CW:FREQuency 10MHz:SOURce:CW:FREQuency?

Command format[:SENSe]:SOURce:CW:POWer[:SENSe]:SOURce:CW:POWer?

Instructions

Sets the CW POWer
Gets the CW POWer

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-40 dB~0 dB

Return

Float

Example:SOURce:CW:POWer -10:SOURce:CW:POWer?

Command format[:SENSe]:SOURce:CWCoupled:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:SOURce:CWCoupled:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets the offset to CF
Gets the offset to CF

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-100GHz~100GHz

Return

Float

Example:SOURce:CWCoupled:FREQuency:OFFSet -10:SOURce:CWCoupled:FREQuency:OFFSet?

Command format[:SENSe]:SOURce:CWCoupled:POWer[:SENSe]:SOURce:CWCoupled:POWer?

Instructions

Sets the CW Offset POWer
Gets the CW Offset POWer

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-40 dB~0 dB

Return

Float

Example:SOURce:CWCoupled:POWer -10:SOURce:CWCoupled:POWer?

3.11.2Channel Power

Measure the power and power density within the specified channel bandwidth. When this function isenabled, the span and resolution bandwidth are automatically adjusted to smaller values. SelectChannel Power and press Meas Setup to set the corresponding parameters.

www.siglent.com

77

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 3-7 Channel Power

Measurement Results: Channel power and power spectral density.
⚫

Channel Power: Power within the integration bandwidth.

⚫

Power Spectral Density: Power (in dBm/Hz) normalized to 1Hz within the integration bandwidth.

Measurement Parameters: Center Freq, Integration BW, Span, Span power.

Command format:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?

Instructions

Read channel power and power spectral density

ReturnFloat , Channel power unit: dBm
Float , A unit of spectral density of power :dBm/Hz

Example:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?

3.11.2.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :78

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.
Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets the average mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumerationEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

3.11.2.2 Integration BW
Set the frequency width of the channel to be tested and the power of the channel is the power integral
within this bandwidth. You can use the numeric keys, knob or direction keys to modify this parameter.
Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration?

Instructions

Sets/gets the integral bandwidthParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

ReturnFloat m unitHz

Example:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration 1.0 GHz

Command format[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer

Instructions

Sets the value of channel sweep to the integral bandwidth

Example:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer

3.11.2.3 PSD Unit
Select power spectral density unit, optional dBm/Hz , dBm/MHz.
Command format:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD?

Instructions

Select the power spectral density unit

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBMHZ|DBMMHZ

ReturnDBMHZ|DBMMHZ

Example:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD DBMHZ:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD?

3.11.3

ACPR

Measure the power of the main channel and adjacent channels as well as the power difference
between the main channel and each of the adjacent channels. When this function is enabled, the spanand resolution bandwidth of the analyzer are adjusted to smaller values automatically.
Select ACPR and press

www.siglent.com

Meas Setup

to set the corresponding parameters.

79

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 3-8 ACPR

Measurement Results: Main CH Power, Left channel power and Right channel power.
⚫

Main CH Power: Displays the power within the bandwidth of the main power⚫

Left channel power : Displays the power of left channel and the power difference between
the left channel and the main channel (in dBc)⚫

Right channel power: Display the power of the right channel and the power difference
between the right channel and the main channel(in dBc)

Measurement parameter: Center frequency, main channel bandwidth, adjacent channel bandwidthand channel spacing

80

Command format:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer:POWer?

Instructions

Get the main channel power
Obtain low and high frequency adjacent channel power

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?

Command format:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer?

Instructions

Obtain the low frequency/high frequency adjacent channel power ratio

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.3.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.
Command format[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Setting average ModeGet average pattern

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumerationEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

3.11.3.2 Main Channel
Set the bandwidth of the main channel and the power of the main channel is the power integral within
this bandwidth.
Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth of the adjacent channel
Obtain the bandwidth of the adjacent channel

Parameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration 20 MHz

3.11.3.3 Adjacent Chn
Set the frequency width of the adjacent channels.
The adjacent channel bandwidth is related to the main channel bandwidth.
Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration]?

Instructions

Set the main channel bandwidth
Get the main channel bandwidthParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat，unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth 20 MHz

www.siglent.com

81

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.3.4 Adj Chn space
Set the difference between the center frequency of the main channel and the center frequency of theadjacent channels.
Adjusting this parameter will also adjust the distance between the upper/lower channel and the main
channel.
Command format[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency]?

Instructions

Set the adjacent channel interval
Gets the adjacent channel intervalParameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat，unitHz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet 20 MHz

3.11.3.5 PSD Unit
Select power spectral density unit, optional is dBm/Hz , dBm/MHz.
Command format:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD?

Instructions

Select the power spectral density unit

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DBMHZ|DBMMHZ

ReturnDBMHZ|DBMMHZ

Example:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD DBMHZ:UNIT: ACPRatio:POWer:PSD?

3.11.4OBW

Integrates the power within the whole span and calculates the bandwidth occupied by this power
according to the specified power ratio. The OBW function also indicates the difference (namely“Transmit Freq Error”) between the center frequency of the channel under measurement and thecenter frequency of the analyzer. Select Occupied BW and press Meas Setup to set thecorresponding parameters.

82

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 3-9 OBW

Measurement Results: occupied bandwidth and transmit frequency error.
⚫

Occupied Bandwidth: Integrates the power within the whole span and then calculates the
bandwidth occupied by the power according to the specified power ratio.

⚫

Transmit Frequency Error: The difference between the center frequency of the channel and thecenter frequency of the analyzer.
Command format:MEASure:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:CENTroid?

Instructions

Read bandwidth and bandwidth center

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:MEASure:OBW?

Command format:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?

Instructions

Get transmission frequency error

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?

3.11.4.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
www.siglent.com

83

SHA850A User Manual

Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

3.11.4.2 Power ratio
Specifies the percentage of total power measured within occupied bandwidth for the current
measurement.
Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth usage percentage
Gets the percentage of occupied bandwidthParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10~99.99

Return

Float

Example:OBW:PERCent 50

3.11.4.3 Power Reference
Select the power reference type.
⚫

Total Power: The measurement result will display the power in the entire span.

⚫

OBW power: The measurement result will display the occupied power.

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence?

Instructions

Setting power Reference
Obtaining power reference

Parameter type

Enumeration TPOW|OBWPower

ReturnEnumeration

Example:OBWidth:PREFerence TPOW

3.11.4.4 x dB
Sets the x dB value used for the "x dB Bandwidth" result, which measures the bandwidth between two
points on the signal that are x dB below the highest signal point in the OBW range.

84

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB?

Instructions

Set the bandwidth USAGE dBc value
Obtain the occupied bandwidth dBc value

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~100

Return

Float

Example:OBWidth:XDB 3

3.11.4.5 Power integration mode
Set the power integration mode to Normal or From-Center.
Command format[:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod][:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod]?

Instructions

Set integral typeGet integral type

Parameter type

Enumeration NORMal|ICENter

ReturnEnumeration

Example:OBWidth:INTegration ICENter

3.11.5

T-Power

The system enters Zero span and calculates the power within the time domain. The types of powers
available include Peak, Average and RMS. Select T-Power and press Meas Setup to set thecorresponding parameters.

Figure 3-10 T-Powerwww.siglent.com

85

SHA850A User Manual

Measurement Results: T-Power
T-Power: The power of the signal from the start line to the stop line.
Measurement Parameter: Center frequency, start line, stop line.
Command format:MEASure:TPOWer?

Instructions

Read time domain power

ReturnFloat , unitdBm

Example:MEASure:TPOWer?

3.11.5.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.
Command format[:SENSe]: TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]: TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

3.11.5.2 Center Frequency
Set the center frequency, this center frequency which is the same with the center frequency of theanalyzer. Modifying this parameter will change the center frequency of the analyzer.
Command format[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instructions

Set the time domain power center frequency
Obtain the time domain power center frequency

Parameter type

Float , unitHz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

related with Span

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer 15kHz

3.11.5.3 Start line
Set the left margin (in time unit) of T-Power measurement. The data calculated under thismeasurement is between the start line and stop line.

86

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit?

Instructions

Set/Query the time domain power measurement start line

Parameter type

Float , unit : s

Parameter Range

0 ~ 1000 s

ReturnFloat , time unit : s

Example:TPOWer:LLIMit 100

3.11.5.4 Stop line
Set the right margin (in time unit) of T-Power measurement. The data calculated under thismeasurement is between the start line and stop line.
Command format[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit?

Instructions

Set/Query the time domain power measurement stop line

Parameter type

Float , unit : s

Parameter Range

0 ~ 1000 s

ReturnFloat , time unit : s

Example:TPOWer:RLIMit 50 s

3.11.6TOI

Automatic measurement of IP3 (Third order Intercept Point), including the power of fundamental wave
and the Third order in the power, and calculate the adjustable Intercept Point.

Figure 3-11 TOI

TOI is an automatic measurement. There are no user controlled parameters.

www.siglent.com

87

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:MEASure:TOI?

Instructions

Read the measurement results of third-order intermodulation distortion
Returns the following values separated by commas in scientific count form:
Lower Tone frequency (Hz), amplitude, Upper Tone frequency (Hz), amplitude,
TOI(Lower 3rd) frequency (Hz), amplitude, third-order intermodulation cutoff(Intercept), High frequency TOI(Upper 3rd) frequency (Hz), amplitude, third-orderintermodulation cut-off point (Intercept).

Return

Float

Example:MEASure:TOI?

Command format:MEASure:TOI:IP3?

Instructions

Read the smaller value in the third-order intermodulation cutoff (Intercept) of low
frequency TOI(Lower 3rd) and high frequency TOI(Upper 3rd)

Return

Float

Example:MEASure:TOI:IP3?

3.11.6.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

3.11.7

Spectrum Monitor

Display the power of the swept spectrum as an intensity color map commonly referred to as a waterfall
chart. Select Spectrum Monitor and press Meas Setup to set the corresponding parameters.

88

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 3-12 Spectrum Monitor

Display the power of spectrum of successive scans as a color map. Also call a waterfall chart.
Measurement Parameter: Spectrogram, Restart.
Spectrogram: Sets the meas state of spectrum monitor.
Restart: clear the measurement and then restart it.
Command format[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe?

Instructions

Set the spectrum to monitor the operating status
Obtain spectrum to monitor operating status

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe 0[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe?

Command format[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart

Instructions

Spectrum rescanning

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart

3.11.7.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:www.siglent.com

89

SHA850A User Manual

Exponentialr :The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]: SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]: SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

3.11.8

CNR

Measure the power of the carrier and noise of the specified bandwidth and their ratio. Select CNR andpress Meas Setup to set the corresponding parameters.

Figure 3-13 CNR

Measurement Results: C/N, Carrier Power, Noise Power.
C/N: the ratio of Carrier Power to Noise Power.
Carrier Power: the total power of the carrier bandwidth.

90

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Noise Power: the total power of the selected noise bandwidth.

Command format:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:CARRier?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:NOISe?

Instructions

Obtain the SNR
Acquisition of carrier powerGet noise power

Return

Float

Example:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?

3.11.8.1 Average Mode
Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponential:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat :Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Sets/gets average mode

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol REPE

3.11.8.2 Carrier BW
Set the bandwidth of the carrier to be measured.
Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration?

Instructions

Sets/gets bandwidth of the carrier

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100 Hz~7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example

INSTrument:CNRatio:MEASure CNR:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration 20 MHz

www.siglent.com

91

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.8.3 Noise BW
Set the bandwidth of the noise to be measured.
Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe?

Instructions

Sets/gets bandwidth of the noise

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100 Hz~3.2 GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth 20 MHz

3.11.8.4 Freq Offset
Set the difference between carrier center frequency and noise center frequency.
Command format[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet?

Instructions

Sets/gets frequency offset

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100 Hz~700 MHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:ACPRatio:OFFSet 20 MHz

3.11.9Harmonics

The harmonic power and total harmonic distortion of carrier signal are measured. The maximum
measurable harmonic is 10th harmonic. The fundamental wave amplitude of carrier signal must be
greater than - 50 dBm, otherwise the measurement result is invalid.

Figure 3-14 Harmonics
92

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

3.11.9.1 Measurement Results:
Each harmonic amplitude and total harmonic distortion of carrier signal. It can measure up to 10th
harmonic.

3.11.9.2 Fundamental
Set the frequency of the fundamental wave.
If the automatic mode is turned on, the fundamental wave will be automatically found from the first
scan. If the automatic mode is turned off, the user can input the fundamental frequency manually.
Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental?

Instructions

Set the fundamental frequency
Get the fundamental frequency

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz~7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat , unitHz

ExampleHARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental 20 MHz

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO?

Instructions

Set the fundamental frequency
Get the fundamental frequency

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

ExampleHARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO 1

3.11.9.3 Freq Step
Set the harmonic step. In auto mode, the frequency of a harmonic is a multiple of the fundamental
frequency.
Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instructions

Set the frequency stepGet the frequency step

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz~7.5 GHz

ReturnFloat , unitHz

Example:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP 20 MHz

Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO?

Instructions

Set the frequency stepGet the frequency step

Parameter type

Booleanwww.siglent.com

93

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP:AUTO 1

3.11.9.4 Harmonic Num
Set the total number of the harmonics to be measured.
Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer?

Instructions

Set harmonic number
Querying harmonic number

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:HARMonics:NUMBer 5

3.11.9.5 Select Harmonic
When "All " is selected, the trace shows the fundamental wave and all harmonics in the sweep
bandwidth.
When 1-10 is selected, the trace shows a zero span trace corresponding to the fundamental wave or
the measured harmonic.
Command format[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect?

Instructions

Set select harmonic
Query select harmonics

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

0 ~ 10ReturnInteger

Example:HARMonics:SELect 7

3.11.10 IQ Acquisition
IQ acquisition is a zero-sweep measurement similar to scan analysis, displaying the input signal
as an I/Q data result, and is commonly used to measure digitally modulated signals.

94

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 3-15 IQ Acquisition

3.11.10.1

Average Mode

Select the type of control used for the averaging function. This determines the average operation after
the specified number of data acquisitions (average count) has been reached. Options include:
Exponentialr:
The measure average operation continuously calculates a weighted average for each index using a
specified number of averages.
Repeat:Each time the specified average is reached, the measurement resets the average counter.

Command format[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol?

Instructions

Set average modeGet average mode

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

EXPOnentialr|REPEat

ReturnEnumeration :EXPOnentialr|REPEat

Example:WAVeform:AVERage:TCONtrol REPEat

3.11.10.2

Measuring time

Set the time for collecting signals.
Command format

www.siglent.com[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME?

95

SHA850A User Manual

Instructions

Set measuring time
Set measuring time

Parameter Type

Float,unit ks,s,ms,usParameter Range

1us ~ 10s

Return

Float

Example:WAVeform:SWEep:TIME 100ms

3.11.10.3

Sampling rate

Set the rate of signal collection, that is, the logarithm of IQ collected by 1s.
Command format[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe[:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe?

Instructions

Set Sampling rate
Get Sampling rate

Parameter Type

Float , unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

1kHz ~ 20MHz

ReturnFloat , UNIT Hz

Example:WAVeform:SRATe 200kHz

3.11.10.4

Sampling period

The inverse of the sampling rate. Only commands can be used for query, but Settings are notsupported.

96

Command format[:SENSe] :WAVeform:APERture?

Instructions

Get the Sampling period

ReturnFloat , unit :sExample:WAVeform:APERture?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4

Cable and Antenna Mode

4.1

Meas Settings
CAT mode provides multiple measurements for different measurement scenarios.

4.1.1

Distance to Fault Measurement

DTF (Distance to Fault) measurements are generally used to locate problems, or faults, in a length ofcable or transimission line. In order to carry out the correct DTF measurement, the wire/ connector/
jumper is required to connect the cable to the instrument.Besides, the cable length, working frequency
range, and the attenuation and velocity factor should be acknowledged in advance.
Measurement steps:
1.

Connect any necessary jumper cable or adapter to the SHA802X Port1.

2.

Press Freq / Dist in the menu to set the frequency range approrately and set the stop
distance of the cable.

3.

Press Cal and and follow the Cal prompts to perform calibration.

4.

Connect a LOAD at the end of the DUT if possible and then connect the start end of the DUT
to the SHA802X.

5.

Press Meas to set the Velocity Factor and Cable Att of the DUT.

Note: A LOAD at the end of the DUT can reduce the repeated reflection inside the DUT.
4.1.1.1 DTF Format
You can select from 3 different DTF formats
Distance to Fault (dB): Faults are displayed on the Y-axis in return loss format. expressed in unit dB.
DTF (VSWR): Faults are displayed on the Y-axis in SWR.
DTF (Lin): Faults are displayed on the Y-axis in linear(unitless)format.
Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:DTF:FORMat:CALCulate[:SELected]:DTF:FORMat?

Instruction

Set/get the dtf meas format

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

LOG , LIN , VSWR

Returnenumeration

Example:CALCulate:DTF:FORMat LOG

4.1.1.2 Max Meas DistanceIn DTF measurements, you set the frequency range of the cable or devie to be tested. SHA802X willcalculate the max meas distance of the measurement from the frequency settings. If higher distancetested is required, you can set more sweep points or less frequency span. The calculation of the Max
distance is as follows:
www.siglent.com

97

SHA850A User Manual

Max Meas distance = (Sweep Points*Velocity Factor*Speed of Light) / 2* Freq Span
Note: According to the formula, It can be acknowledged that the resolution is only frequency
related. That means higher frequency span leads to higher resolution.

4.1.1.3 Velocity Factor
Velocity Factor is a the ratio of the velocity of the electric signal in the cabl to that in the vacuum. For
example, A polyethylene dielectric cable has VF =0.66 and a cable with PTFE dielectric has VF =0.7.
In the DTF/TDR measurement it is used to calculate the distances by the reflection time. In order to
get accurate positons of the impedance discontinuities, Velocity Factor should be considered andclarified. Distance to Fault Measurement.
Command Format[:SENSe#]:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX[:SENSe#]:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX?

Instruction

Set/get the velocity factor

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~1

ReturnFloat0.1~1

Example:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX 0.5

4.1.1.4 Cable Loss
Cable Loss is specified in dB/meter. In addition to the length of the cable, loss is also directly
proportional to the frequency of the signal that passes through the cable.
For example, The DUT is a 100 meter transmission cable. The Cable Loss value is 0.1Db/meter. Thatmeans that a signal traveling one way through the cable will lose 10 dB of power. Considering DTF
measurement is perfomed with 1 port, the signal traveled down the cable and then back, for a total
loss of 20 dB.
Command Format:CORRection:LOSS:COAX:CORRection:LOSS:COAX?

Instruction

Set/get the cable loss

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-10dB/m~100dB/m

Return

Float

Example:CORRection:LOSS:COAX 5

4.1.1.5 Window
Due to the limitations of instrument, the measured data is restricted to the frequency range rather thanan infinite range. That means the frequency domain data is truncated at the start/end of the data
sample, which will cause overshooting and ringing in the time domain.
Therefore, the window should be applied to gradually reduce the marginal frequency response andcontrol the side lobe formed by the truncation.

98

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Press Meas->Window to choose from the following:
Rectanglar, Hamming and Off.

4.1.2

Command Format

CALCulate:DTF:TRANsform:WINDow
CALCulate:DTF:TRANsform:WINDow?

Instruction

Set/get the dtf window

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

OFF , RECT , HAMM

Returnenumeration

ExampleCALCulate:DTF:TRANsform:WINDow OFF

Return Loss Measurements

Return loss can be thought of as the absolute value of the reflected power compared to the incident
power.
For instance, when measuring an OPEN or SHORT, all incident power is reflected and approximately
0 dB return loss is displayed.When measuring a LOAD, very little power is reflected and values of 40
dB to 60 dB are displayed.

4.1.3

1-Port Cable Loss Measurements

All cables have inherent loss, plus weather and time will deteriorate cables and cause even moreenergy to be abosorbed by the cable.The cable loss will affect the power loss of the transmitter andwill have a negative impact on the return loss of the system.
In Distance to Fault measurement, it is not apparent to observe the degree of deteriorating.In suchcase, Cable Loss measurement is necessary to measure the accumulated losses throughout thelength of the cable.

4.1.4

2-Port Insertion Loss Measurement

Insertion loss refers to the loss of load power caused by the cable or components inserted between
the transimitter and receiver, usually referred to as attenuation. The insertion loss is expressed in dB
corresponding to the received signal level. This measurement is consistent with S21 measurement in
VNA mode.
Use 2-Port Insertion Loss measurement to measure the loss of DUT in a specific frequency range.
On SHA802X, Ouput signal was transmitted from Port1/Source through cable to RF in/Port2. Bothends of the DUT must be connected to the SHA802X.
A 2-port Insertion Loss measurement is usually more accurate than a 1-port Cable Lossmeasurement.

www.siglent.com

99

SHA850A User Manual

4.1.5

Time Domain Reflection Measurement

In time domain reflection measurement, the frequency domain data is converted to time domain databy inverse Fourier transform. The response values apprear separated in time, allowing a different
perspective of the test device’s performance and limitations. The Time Domain response not onlyshows the location of the mismatch point, but also displays the characteristic of the impedance
discontinuity. It helps quickly locate the fault point on the cable, and preliminarily identify the fault
type.If there is multiple mismatchs in the cable. The measurement steps are the same with DTF.
4.1.5.1 TDR Format
TDR (Lin rho): The Y-axis of the diplay is linear, real, unitless values. A trace without reflections
shows as 0 while maximum reflections from an open or short show as 1.
TDR (ohm): The Y-axis of the display is impedance (ohms).

Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:TDR:FORMat:CALCulate[:SELected]:TDR:FORMat?

Instruction

Set/get the tdr meas format

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

OHM , LIN

ReturnOHM|LIN

Example:CALCulate:TDR:FORMat LIN

4.1.5.2 Frequency ModeIn time domain reflection measurement, in order to stimulate a traditional TDR measurement, there
are som specifi limitations on the frequency range of the measurement.
It is required that the measured , positive data points are linearly spaced so that they are harmonicallyrelated from DC to the stop frequency. The measurement frequencies must be set so that the sop
frequency meets the formula:𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑝 = 𝑓𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑟𝑡 ∗ 𝑆𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑝 𝑝𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑡𝑠
Since the Fourirer Transform includes effects of the DC value on the frequency response and theanalyzer does not measure the DC response, the DC value is extrapolated and calculated, as it isrequired to generate the step stimulus. The remainder of the data is calculated from taking a mirror
image of the original measured response. The assumption is that the response Is Hermitian, in thatthe negative frequency response is conjugate of the positive frequency response and thus, the time
domain response must be pure real-valued.
If the frequency range is limited to band-pass and does not meet the criterion above, then the
Distance to Fault measurement should be used instead. If the frequency step is large, there wil be
undersampling occurring. The predominant symptom of this is the measured impedance is incorrect.
For example, when measuring a 50Ω cable, the measure result of a part/point without reflections is
30Ω.

100

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

To avoid undersampling, try to set stop frequency to a smaller value if the maximum measurement
range allows, and ensure that the start frequency is below 500kHz as far as possible to obtain a higher
resolution.

4.1.5.3 Velocity Factor
Velocity Factor is a the ratio of the velocity of the electric signal in the cabl to that in the vacuum. For
example, A polyethylene dielectric cable has VF =0.66 and a cable with PTFE dielectric has VF =0.7.
In the DTF/TDR measurement it is used to calculate the distances by the reflection time. In order to
get accurate positons of the impedance discontinuities, Velocity Factor should be considered andclarified. Distance to Fault Measurement.
Command Format[:SENSe#]:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX[:SENSe#]:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX?

Instruction

Set/get the velocity factor

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~1

ReturnFloat0.1~1

Example:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX 0.5

4.1.5.4 Cable Loss
Cable Loss is specified in dB/meter. In addition to the length of the cable, loss is also directly
proportional to the frequency of the signal that passes through the cable.
For example, The DUT is a 100 meter transmission cable. The Cable Loss value is 0.1Db/meter. Thatmeans that a signal traveling one way through the cable will lose 10 dB of power. Considering DTF
measurement is perfomed with 1 port, the signal traveled down the cable and then back, for a total
loss of 20 dB.

Command Format:CORRection:LOSS:COAX:CORRection:LOSS:COAX?

Instruction

Set/get the cable loss

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-10dB/m~100dB/m

Return

Float

Example:CORRection:LOSS:COAX 5

4.1.5.5 Stimulus TypeYou can change the stimulus type to observe different response.
Impulse:In inverse calculation, the frequency spectrum of an ideal unit impulse response is constant 1. So
the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain data is the impulse reponse.
www.siglent.com

101

SHA850A User Manual

Step:
The Step response is the calculation result obntained by integraeting the corresponding trace
data of the impluse stimulation response.
Command Format

CALCulate:TDR:STIMulus:TYPE
CALCulate:TDR:STIMulus:TYPE?

Instruction

Set/get the stimulation type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

IMPULse , STEP

Returnenumeration

ExampleCALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance: TYPE STEP

4.1.5.6 Kaiser Beta
Like the Windowing in DTF measurement, Kaiser window is used in Time Domain Refelction to
reduce overshooting and ringing during the inverse Fourier Transform.
By setting the Kaiser Beta in Meas window, it changes the rise time and impulse width of the stimulus
signal. Essentially it realizes the suppression of truncation effect and the sidelobe level. The larger the
Kaiser beta is, the more obvious the suppression effect will be, but at the same time, it will increase
the rise time of stimulus signal. thus reducing the resolution of the time domain transformation result.

Figure 4-1 Kaiser Beta

102

Command Format

CALCulate:TDR:WINDow:beta
CALCulate:TDR:WINDow:beta?

Instruction

Set/get the beta of the kaiser window

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0~13

Return

Float

ExampleCALCulate:TDR:WINDow:beta 6

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.1.5.7 Time Gating
When viewing the Time Domain reponse of a device, the gating function allows manualy choose therequired time-domain response and elimilate undesired time domain response, and then view thefrequency domain characteristic curve of the required reponse through Fourier transform, The gating
function enables the DUT to be characterized without connectors or adapters.
Operating Steps:
Click Meas on the panel/menu, then choose Time Gating to open the menu, then set the Gate start,
Gate Stop, Gate Type and Gate Shape in the menu. It is recommended to perform in TDR & Return
Loss measurement so that the frequency response after gating can be viewed.
Gating on: Open or close the gating function.
Gate Start: Set the start distance of the gate.
Gate Stop: Set the stop distance of the gate.
Gate Type: Set the type of filtering perfomed by the gating function.
Band Pass: Keep the response in the gating span.
Notch: Remove reponse using the gating span.
Gate Shape: Set the filter characteristics of the gating function. There are four options: minimum,
normal, wide, and maximum.

Figure 4-2 Gate ShapeParameter description of gating function:

4.1.6

Output Power

Set the output power of Port 1. The default power is 0 dbm, which is the maximum power. Whenmeasureing long cable or passive high loss device, use high outpower is suggested.
www.siglent.com

103

SHA850A User Manual

4.2

Command Format:SOURce#:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SOURce#:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?

Instruction

Set/get the output power

Parameter Type

Float, unitless

Parameter Range-40dB ~ 0 dB

Return

Float

Example:SOURce1:POWer -20

Freq/Dist

Set the frequency or distance range of the current measurement. Distance range can only be set in
DTF/TDR.
Set the appropriate RF frequency to observe the correct corresponding trace of the DUT(cable,
antenna, etc.).
Start：Specify the starting frequency of the swept measurement range
Stop：Specify the end frequency of the swept measurement range
Start Distance: Specify the start distance of the measurement result to be displayed. The default is 0m, which means it will display the trouble points from the calibration plane.
Stop Distance: Specify the stop distance of the measurement result to be displayed. It can not be set
above max meas distance. The frequency range settings will affect the max meas distance, Refer to4.9.1.2 Max Measurement Distance for details.
The default distance unit is Meter, it can be changed to Feet.

104

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Set/query the start frequency

Parameter Type

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz

Parameter Range

100kHz~7.4999999GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:STARt 100 Hz

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Set/query the stop frequency

Parameter Type
Parameter Range

Float , Unit: Hz , kHz , MHz , GHz
100.1kHz ~ 7.5GHz

ReturnFloat , Unit: Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0 GHz

Command Format

CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STARt
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STARt?

Instruction

Set/get the start distanceParameter TypeFloat

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.3
4.3.1

Parameter Range

0~max distance-0.2m

Return

Float

ExampleCALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STARt 1m

Command Format

CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STOP
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STOP?

Instruction

Set/get the stop distanceParameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0~max distance

Return

Float

ExampleCALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STOP 2

Command Format

CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:UNIT
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:UNIT?

Instruction

Set/get the distance unit

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

METers | FEET

Return

MET | FEET

ExampleCALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:UNIT FEET

Amplitude
Scale/Reference level and Position

Scale : Sets the vertical indexing value of the coordinate. The setting range is different under eachmeasurement.
Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1||2|:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1||2|:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instruction

Set/query the scale

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

1~999

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow1:TRACe1:Y:PDIVision 10

Reference level : Sets the value of the guide.
Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

Set/query the ref level

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

1~999

Return

Float

Example:DISPlay:WINDow1:TRACe1:Y: RLEVel 10

www.siglent.com

105

SHA850A User Manual

Reference Position : Sets the position of the guide of rectangular coordinate. Zero is the bottom line
and 10 is the top line. The default postion is 5,which is middle of screen.

4.3.2

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?

Instruction

Set/query the ref pos

Parameter Type

IntegralParameter Range

0~10

ReturnIntegralExample:DISPlay:WINDow1:TRACe1:Y: RPOSition 5

Automatic Scaling

Auto Scale : Automatically sets the vertical indexing value and reference value to fit the working data
trace in the screen grid area. The excitation value and reference postion are not affected. SHA802X
will determine the minimum possible scaling factor that will allow all display data to apprear on the 80%
vertical grid.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

Instruction

Set the auto scale

Example:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

Auto Scale All : utomatically scales all data traces in the working window to fit vertically into the gridarea of the screen.

4.4

Sweep

4.4.1

Points

Sweep Points are the number of data samples representing the measured values in a single sweep.
More sweep points will improve the resolution of the waveform, but also affect the minimum sweep
time, increase the data processing time and remote access time, and reduce the response rate.

4.4.2

Sweep Time

Sweep time is automatically set according to the Sweep points by default.When Sweep time mode isauto, the fastest response time that analyzer need to configure the hardware and collect every single
point data is calculated and applied.
When measuring long lengths of cable, you can slow the seep time so that more stable and reliable
waveform can be observed.
Note: Setting the sweep time manually will change the sweep time mode.

106

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Set/query the sweep time

Parameter Type

Float , Unit : ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

1us ~ 6000s

ReturnFloat , Unit:s

Example:SWEep:TIME 5s

Command Format[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

Set/query the sweep time auto stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:TIME:AUTO 1

4.4.3

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure :Single/Continue , controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure.This setting isContinue by default.
Restart :Restart the current sweep or measure.In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart will
be performed.Sweep parameters include frequency, sweep , average settings.

Command Format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instruction

Set/query the continuous sweep mode

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restart sweep

Example:INITiate:IMMediatewww.siglent.com

107

SHA850A User Manual

4.5

Averaging

Use averaging to help smooth a trace and reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement. It
will average the multiple sweep results of every point according to the average times setting.The
higher the number of average times, the more dandom noise is eliminated.
Click BW→Averaging/Avg Times to enable averaging and set average times.
When the Averaging is enabled, the number of sweeps currently used for averaging and the averagetimes are displayed on the left statusbar.

4.6
4.6.1

Command Format[:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe]?

Instruction

Set/query the average stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:Average 1

Command Format[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt?

Instruction

Set/query the average number

Parameter Type

IntegralParameter Range

1~999

ReturnIntegralExample:Average:COUNt 25

Trace
Select Trace

For the coupling measurement in CAT, such as DTF&Return Loss, there are two traces to be selected.
Use Select Trace for trace setting, calculation and other operations. For those single measurement
like VSWR, it has only one trace and it is not selectable.

108

Command Format:CALCulate#:PARameter:SELect

Instruction

Set the select trace

Parameter Type

IntegralParameter Range

1~2

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:SELect 1

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.6.2

Display Trace

The analyzer supports saving the current data-trace in memory. It can perform four kinds ofmathematical operations on the current data-trace and memory trace. When the mathermaticaloperation with memory trace needs to be carried out, the current data needs to be stored in memory
first.
Go to Trace menu, Click Data→Memory to complete the storage operation.
Command Format:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:MEMorize

Instruction

Memorize the data from current trace

Example:CALCulate:MATH:MEMorize

If memory trace data was valid, In the Display menu bar, you can select four display modes: Display
data-trace only, display memory trace , display data-trace and memory trace at the same time anddisplay off.

4.6.3

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets data-trace to open or off

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe2:STATe 1

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:MEMory[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:MEMory[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets mem-trace to open or off

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe2:MEMory 1

Math

The four mathematical operations of data-trace and memory trace are as follows, in which the values
on data-trace and memory trace are linear:
Data/Memory : Divide the measured data by the data in the stored trace.This function can be used to
calculate the ratio of two traces(such as calculating gain or attunuation), which can also be regarded
as the normalization operation of test data.
Data*Memory : The current measurement data is multiplied by the data in memory.
Data+Memory : Current measurement data plus data in memory.
Data-Memory : Current measurement data minus data in memory. For example, you can use thisfunction to store measured data. The error is then substracted from the DUT measurement.

www.siglent.com

109

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion
OFF|DIVide|MULtiply|SUBtract|ADD:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion?

Instruction

Sets/gets mathematical operations on current trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF | DIVide | Multiply | SUBtract | ADD

ReturnEnumeraiton, OFF|DIVide|MULtiply|SUBtract|ADD

Example:CALculate:MATH:FUNC DIVide

Note: In DTF and TDR measurement, Math is not supported.

4.7

Marker & Peak

4.7.1

Marker Settings

The marker appears as a rhombic sign for identifying points on a trace and display definedmeasurement data of traces. The analyzer allows for up to seven markers and one reference marker
to be displayed on one trace.
4.7.1.1 Select Marker
Press the Marker button on the front panel and go to Marker menu. If there is no active marker,
Marker1 will be automatically turned on.After the marker is created, the measurement value of themarker will be displayed at the top right of the window, and the value format is the same as the formatof the trace. Click Select Marker to select desired marker.When a marker is selected, you can set its
type, trace to be markerd, X values and other related parameters.

110

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct?

Instruction

Set/query the current marker

Parameter Typeenumeration 1-8

Returnenumeration : 1-8

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct 5

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe 1|2|
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe?

Instruction

Set/query the marker mark trace

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

1|2

Returnenumeration

ExampleCALCulate:MARK:TRAC 1

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.7.1.2 Marker TypeThree types of marker are supported as follow:
Normal:
It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) values of a certain point on the
trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (such as “1”) appears on the
trace. If there is no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at the center
frequency of the current trace.If selected marker has been opened and configured before, reopen themarker will set to the previous X values.
Note: The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

Delta:
It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) between thereference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair of markers appear on the trace
Fixed Reference marker (marked by letter “R”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “Δ”, such as“Δ1”)
Note: After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delat measurement marker,
and the reference marker will automatically turn on. The readout information on current Delat marker
will show the frequency (or time) difference and amplitude difference compared to the ReferenceMarker’s value.

Off:
Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen and functions
based on the marker will also be turned off.

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/gets marker type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition|DELTa|OFF

ReturnPOS|DELT||OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets marker on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

www.siglent.com

111

SHA850A User Manual

Note: Marker 8 equals reference marker, which can not be set to Delta Marker type.

Command Format: CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Sets all marker type to Off

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

4.7.1.3 Marker X
Displays and sets the x-axis position of the marker. The unit of readout values is identical to thecurrent x-axis. For instance, When the measurement is Distance to Fault, the unit is meter, and whenthe measurement is Return Loss, the unit is frequency.
When setting marker X value, it can only be set within the range of the current X axis.When themeasurement range/span changes, the exceeding Marker will be set to the current measurement startvalue or stop value, depending on whether the Marker X value exceeds the start value or stop value.
When the marker type is Off , the marker X is not settable

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instruction

Sets/gets the marker X value
This command is effective only when the marker mode is not Off
Use command below to set marker mode/type::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter TypeFrequency, Float, Unit Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz, default to Hz
Time, Float, Unit us, ms, s, ks, default to s

Parameter Range

100kHz to max frequency or 10ms ~ 1000s

ReturnFrequency, Float, Unit Hz;
Time, Float, UInit s;

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instruction

gets marker Y value
When the data format is Smith/Polar, there are multiple returned values
depending on the specific Smith/Polar Type.

ReturnLoMag, Float, unit dB; Phase, Float, unit degree;
SWR, Float, unitless(U); Group Delay, Float, time(s);LinMag, Float, unitless(U)Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return : -25

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

4.7.1.4 Markers All Off
Use Markers All Off to set all markers’ type to Off.
112

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Close all markers

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Parameter Type

Float

ReturnFloat , Unit: Consistent with the current measurement Y-axis format

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return : -25

4.7.1.5 Marker Couple
This is a specific setting for DTF&TDR measurement in CAT as only under such measurement canthere be multiple traces with the same X-Axis (distance).
When Marker Couple is on, Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces.
When Marker Couple is off, Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace.

4.7.2

Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instruction

Sets/gets the marker couple stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle 1:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle?

Peak Search

Open the peak setting menu and execute peak search. Press Peak to search for positive value whichis greater than the measured value at both ends of a span. Press Valley to perform the oppsite
search.

4.7.3

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instruction

Marker searches for peaks on the selected trace and marks them withthe current selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Minimum

Instruction

Marker searches for valleys on the selected trace and marks them withthe current selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MinimumContinue Peak/Valley

Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will alwayse
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.

www.siglent.com

113

SHA850A User Manual

Note: Each trace only supports one pair of marker to perform continuous peak/valley. For example, if
certain marker is doing Continuous Peak, set other marker Continous Peak to on will automatically
set the previous one to Off.

4.8

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Continue Peak Search On/Off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Continue Valley Search On/Off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CVSEarch ON

Limit

Limit Line is a test form that can visualize test data and results. The limit test compares the measured
data with the defined limit and provides the qualified or unqualified judgment information of eachmeasured data point. Limit line and limit test are only available in LogMag/ LinMag data format.When
the trace that has limit working on switching to other data format, the limit will automatically set todisable.

4.8.1

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit test on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:STATe OFF

Limit Edit

Click Limit to the limit menu, Enable certain Limit so that Limit Edit submenu is valid. In Limit Edit,
you can set limit type, limit mode and modify/load/save the limit data.

114

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 4-3 Limit Edit

Limit Type:Set the limit type as upper/lower.This setting is default to Upper.
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

Return

UPP|LOW

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: UPPer

Limit Mode:
Set Whether the limit line is a straight flat line or a polyline connected by limit points. This setting isdefault to Line.
When the limit mode is Line, only setting the limit line amplitude is required. When the limit mode is
Point, Use add/delete point button in the menu, and set both X and Y value of each point by selecting
the specific limit point or directly touch the screen in the limit table to select and set points. Afterchanging the X value of a limit point, the limit points list will be sorted from small to large by X value.

Use the following command to set limit mode:
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit mode

Parameter Type

Enumerationwww.siglent.com

115

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

LINE|POINt

ReturnLINE|POINt

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: UPPer

Use the following command to set limit line amplitude:
Command Format:CALCulate::LLINE[1]|2:LINE:CALCulate::LLINE[1]|2:LINE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit line amplitude value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-150 ddB to 150

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:LINE 50

Use the following command to add/set limit point data,
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt#:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt#:DATA?
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt:ADD val1,val2

Instruction

Sets/gets a specific point data,if point index is greater than the list size,
the command will not take effect.
Add a point after the current points list

Parameter Type

val1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Parameter Range

val1:related with Spanval2:-150 to 150

Returnval1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:ADD 100,-20,200,-25
That means add two points: (100,-20) , (200, -25)
:CALCulate::LLINe2:POINt4: 100,-20
That means change point4 to (100,-20)

Use the following command to set all limit points
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINts:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINts?

Instruction

Sets/gets all limie points
This command will erase the previous limit points and set with input
valuesParameter Type

val1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Parameter Range

val1:related with Spanval2:-150 to 150

Returnval1:Float, frequency
val2:Float, amplitude

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINts 100, -20, 200, -25, 300, -30

Use the following command to delete limit point/points:

116

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.8.2

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe#:POINt#:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe#:POINts:DELete

Instruction

Delete certain limit’s certain/all limit points

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:POINt1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe1:POINts:DELete

Limit Test

Limit Test: According to the Enabled limit, start/stop test on the selected trace.
⚫

If limit Test is set On , a pass/fail sign will appear on top of grid area which indicates whether thecurrent trace passed the limit test. When there are two limits taking effect on different trace, thelimit result will be result1 & result2.

⚫

If you add two limit points and the X values are the same but Y values are not, the smaller Y
value will be tested when the limit type is Upper and otherwise the opposite.

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instruction

Sets/gets the on/off state of limit test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate”LLINe:TEST 1

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:FAIL?

Instruction

Query the current result of certain limit

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL1

4.8.2.1 Buzzer
Open/close buzzer function.When the Buzzer is set to On and the test result is fail, buzzer will make ashort beep.

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instruction

Sets/gets the Buzzer on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

Attention: If the Buzzer is set to off in system settings, despite turning on the buzzer in limit test , it will
not beep when test fails.

www.siglent.com

117

SHA850A User Manual

4.8.2.2 Fail to Stop
This Funtion meets the demand to observe the failure result. When the fail to stop is set to on and thetest fails, it will stop the sweep.
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instruction

Sets/gets the fail to stop stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

4.9

Calibration

Due to the systematic errors, cabling, adapters, probes and more, the DUT ususally can’t bemeasured directly and accurately. These errors are caused by leakage signals inside the instrument,by the frequency response of the receivers, and by reflections inside the instrument that interact with
the DUT. It is necessary to introduce calibration compensation to help achieve higher accuracy. Aftercalibration, the S parameter calibration is applied to the calculation results and the errors are removed
from subsequent measurements.

4.9.1

Definitions

DUT (Devie Under Test) The Cable, antenna, transmission line, amplifier, filter, or anything else thatis connected to the SHA802X that is to be measured.
Calibration Standards – OPEN, SHORT, LOAD, and THRU
OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD are ‘reflection’ standards that are used during calibration. When an RF
signal ‘hits’ these components, the signals are reflected in a predictable manner. These components
can also be used to terminate a DUT port during some measurements.
SHORT and OPEN standards both cause 100% of an RF signal to be reflected. The difference
between these two standards is what happens to the phase of the reflected signal. Although an OPEN
standard is a precision component, simply leaving nothing connected at the end of a cable can be areasonable substitute for an OPEN.
A LOAD standard absorbs almost ALL of the incident signal and very little signal is reflected back tothe source.
A THRU standard is used during some calibration steps to connect PORT1 to PORT2 in place of the
DUT. A Flush THRU connection can be made when the cables that connect with the DUT can matewith each other. Otherwise, any reasonably short cable can be used as a THRU standard.
Calbration Reference Plane is the point(or points) at which the DUT and cal standards areconnected during a calibration. This can be at the FiedFox test port connectors, or at the end of
jumper cables or adapters.

118

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.9.2

Calibration Kit

4.9.2.1 Standard Cal Kit
SHA802X provides a variety of default calibration kit standards, including F503, F603, F504, F604,
85032F, 85032B/E, 85032D/E.
Select correct Cal Kit gender so that correct Cal Kit data is applied in calibration. Please refer to thedata manual of coaxial calibration kit for detailed Cal Kit parameters and applicable scenarios.
The Document URL is as follow :https://siglentna.com/wp-content/uploads/dlm_uploads/2021/04/Mechanical-Calibration-Kit-Datasheet-v1.4.pdf

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel?

Instruction

Sets/gets the current cal kit

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range\"F503E\ " , \"F603E\" , \"F504S\" , \"F604S\",\"85032F\" , \"85032B/E\" , \"85033D/E\"\"User1\" , \"User2\"

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel \"85032F\"

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer?

Instruction

Sets/gets the male/female properties of the current calibration suite

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

MALE|FEMAle

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer MALE

4.9.2.2 User Kit
When the user are using standards (or combinations of standards) that are different from thepredefined standard Cal Kits,for example, using three offset SHORTS instead of an OPEN, SHORT,
and Load to perform a 1-port calibration, it requires users to create custom User calibration kits.
Operation Instructions:
Press Cal -> Cal Kit -> User1/User2, edit types, delays and OPEN/SHORT standard samples tocreate cusrom kit.

www.siglent.com

119

SHA850A User Manual

4.9.3

Calibration Type4.9.3.1 Open Response Calibration
when a single port is used for open-circuit response calibration, the reflection tracking error in the error
model of the test device can be calculated by only connecting the OPEN calibration element or evensimply NOTHING to the test port. If the Load calibration element is used for isolation calibration at thesame time, the directional error can be calculated.
Calibration Steps :1. Preset the instrument.
2. Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.
3. Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Open Cal
4. Connect the OPEN calibration element to the test port according to the interface prompts,
click Open for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface after calibration,complete the calibration, and save the calibration data.

4.9.3.2 Short Circuit Response Calibration :Like the open-circuit response calibration, the single-port short-circuit response is connected to theport with the SHORT calibrarion element, and the reflection tracking error can be calculated. If the
Load calibration element is used for isolation calibration at the same time, the directional error can becalculated.
Calibration Steps :1. Preset the instrument.
2. Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band, Cal Kit and otherparameters.
3. Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Short Cal
4. Connect the SHORT calibration element to the Port 1 according to the interface prompts, click
Short for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface after calibration,complete the calibration, and save the calibration data.

4.9.3.3 Full 1-Port OSL calibration :All 1-port OSL calibration connects the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD calibration elements to the test
ports in turn to calculate the reflection tracking error, directional error, and source matching error in therror model of the test device.
Calibration Steps :1. Preset the instrument.

120

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

2. Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.
3. Select Cal -> Calibrate -> 1-Port Cal
4. Connect the OPEN calibration element to the Port 1 according to the interface prompts andclick Open for calibration. Wait till the sweep is complete then connect the SHORT calibration
element to the Port 1, click Short for calibration. Wait till the sweep is complete then connect
the LOAD calibration element to the Port 1, click the Load for calibration. After the calibration,
click FINISH to exit the calibration inter face , complete the calibration, and save thecalibration data.

4.9.3.4 Transimission Response Calibration :Two-port transmission response calibration is to connect the THRU calibration kit between Port1 andPort2 to calculate the transmission tracking error in the test device error model.
Calibration Steps :1. Preset the instrument.
2. Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.
3. Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Response-Thru Cal
4. Connect the THRU calibration element between Port1 and Port2, click Thru for calibration,and click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, and save thecalibration data.

4.9.3.5 Enhanced Response Calibration:
Two-port enhanced response calibration connects the Thru calibration element between two ports,
and connects the Open, Short, and Load on one port for calibration.
Calibration Steps :1. Preset the instrument.
2. Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.
3. Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Enhanced-Res Cal
4. Connect OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD on the Port 1 and press corresponding button tocomplete the calibration successively, and then connect the THRU calibration kit between
the two ports to perform the Thru calibration. After the calibration is completed, click Finish toexit the calibration interface, complete the calibration and save the calibration data.

After the calibration is complete and data is successfully saved, Corresponding compensation apply

www.siglent.com

121

SHA850A User Manual

button Apply xxx Cali will appear in the menu. Set on/off to control whether applys the calibration
data or not.

Here’s commands for calibration :Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/gets the cal type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

NONE|OPEN|SHORT|1PORT|THRU|ENHAnced|E11|E21

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE SHORT

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN

Instruction

Collecting open step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt

Instruction

Collecting short step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD

Instruction

Collecting load step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:THRU

Instruction

Collecting through step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:THRU 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE

Instruction

After the calibration procedure is completed, the calibration data is saved andappliedExample:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE 1

Notice: Highest measurement accuracy is achieved when the frequency range or sweep settings
remain the same during the measurement as when the calibration is performed. If these settingschange after the calibration, SHA802X will interpolate the calibration so that it can still make VERY
accurate measurement.
Interpolated Calibrations are only slightly less accurate than a calibration performed at themeasurement settings. When a calibration that you performed is being interpolated, a questionmark
will be added to the Cal annotation. For example: S11:C? is shown on the screen when the current
Response or Mechanical cal is being interpolated. In order to achive better measurement accuracy, it
is recommended to recalibrate after changing the sweep-relevent settings.

122

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

4.9.4

Ecal

Ecal is a new automatic calibration technology for VNA mode. Every ECal module contains electronic
standards that are automatically switched into position during a measurement calibration. Theseelectronic standards have been measured at athe factory and the data stored within the memory of
the ECal module. The analyzer uses this stored data, along with the measured data, to calculated theerror terms for a measurement calibration. Ecal offers the following advantages compared to
Mechanical calibration kit:
1.

The calibration process is simple. The electronic calibrator only needs to be connected to the
SHA802X once to complete the test items required by the dual-port calibration, without theneed for multiple calibration connections.

2.

A shorter time is required for calibration.

3.

There are fewer uncertain factors in the calibration process, and the probability of electroniccalibration being affected by misoperation is reduced because there is no need for multiple
connection processes.

Ecal Calibtration Steps:
1.

Connect the USB port on the ECal module with the USB port of SHA802X via a USB cable.
When the Ecal module indicator switch to “Ready”, it indicates the Ecal module has enteredideal working condition/temperature. After connect the module, the type of module,
frequency range, and connector type are automatically recoginized.

2.

Press Cal->Ecal Info to view all parameters of the characterization stored in the ECal
module.

Figure 4-4 Ecal Informationwww.siglent.com

123

SHA850A User Manual

In the figure above, you can see the date of production, frequency range , Number of Points andConnector type.

124

3.

Click Load Ecal to start loading the data of selected Measurement characteristics to the
SHA802X. If it is loaded before, then it will compare with saved data for consistency.

4.

Click Calibrate▼, Select S11 ECal or S21 Ecal to perform 1 port or two ports calibration
respectively. Connect the calibration part and instrument port correctly according to thecalibration prompt, click Enter to automatically calibrate then click Finish to save and apply
the calibration data.

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:ECAL?

Instruction

Check whether the electronic calibration part is connected to the instrument

ReturnBoolean , 0|1

Example:CORR:COLL:METH:ECAL?

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE?

Instruction

Set/query electronic calibration parts available electronic standard sample data

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

Determined by electronic calibration part Return
example:Factory User1

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:ECal:MODULE Factory

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:CANCEL

Instruction

Execute/cancel the electronic calibration part to load the current selected
electronic standard sample data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5

Vector Network Analyzer Mode

5.1

Meas Setting

5.1.1

Meas TypeSet the S parameters type of measurement.
S parameters are used to describe the deree of a transmitted or reflected signal through an
impedance discountinuity. S parameters are relative measurements which defined the ratio of twocomplex voltage and contained the amplitude and phase information of the relevant signals.
Two S parameters(S11,S21) can be measured.The syntax for each parameter is decribed by thefollowing:
S (i|j)i represents the receiving port of the Instrument (Port 2).The transimitted signal enters the port after
passing through the DUT.
j represents the source port of Instrument (Port 1).The ouput signal of this port is provided to the DUT.
S11 is also called Reflection Measurement.It is used to measure the amount of reflections off thecorresponding DUT port.
S21 is also called Transimission Measurement.It is used to measure the loss or the gaim through a
DUT over a specified frequency range.When conducting S21 measurements, both ends of the DUT
must be connected to the device.

Command Format

5.1.2:CALCulate#:PARameter#:DEFine:CALCulate#:PARameter#:DEFine?

Instruction

Sets the measure type of VNA
Gets the measure type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

S11,S21ReturnS11|S21

Example:CALCulate#:PARameter#:DEFine S11

Format

The data format is the method bt which the vector network analyzer displayse the measured datagraphically. Select the data format that corresponds to the information you want to know about the test
device.
Log amplitude scheme :Display amplitude (no phase).
Y : dB.
Typical measurements：Return loss,insertion loss or gai
www.siglent.com

125

SHA850A User Manual

Lin Mag :Only positive values are displayed.
Y : No Unit (U, suitable for proportional measurement) .
Typical measurements : Reflection and transmission coefficients (amplitude),
Phase format :The phase of the signal is measured relative to the calibration reference plane, within a range of±180 degrees. Each 180-degree trace is “wrapped” for easy scaling
Y: Phase (degrees)
Typical measurement : Linear phase shift.
Note: Phase unwrapping is accomplished by the comparing the phases of two adjacent data
points. If the phase difference between two points is greater than 180 degrees, or the DC offset
phase of the first data point is greater than 180 degrees, then the phase measurement may not
be accurate.
Unwrap phase :Same phase, but no 180-degree entanglement.
Group delay format :Displays the transmission (propagation) time of signal in the device
Y: Time (s)Typical measurement: Group delay
SWR format :Displays the reflection measurements calculated from the formula (1+R)/(1-R), whrer R is thereflection coefficient. When standing wave ratio is 1, it indicates the DUT matches the device
impedance, and energy is transmitted completely without any reflections.When standing wave ratio is∞, it indicates the energy is total reflected.
Note: Valid for reflection measurements only
Y: No units
Typical measurements: SWR
Smith circle diagram :Smith diagrams are a tool for mapping complex reflectance coefficients to test the impedance ofequipment. In the Smith chart, the linear impedance planse is reshaped to from a cyclic grid fromwhich the resistance and reactance (R+jX) can be read.
The horizontal axis represents the real part of the difference between impedance andresistance.Horizontal axis center always represents the sytem impedance.The rightmost value isinfinite ohms (open circuit). The leftmost value is zero ohms (short circuit). The circle intersecting thehorizontal axis represents the constant reactance, and the arc tangent to the horizontal axis
reprensents the constant impedance. The upper part of the Smith chart is the area where the126

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manualreactance component is positive and therefore inductance is generated, while the lower part is thearea whrere the reactance component is negative and there fore capacitance is generated.
In Smith circle diagram, 5 marker formats are supported: Lin/Phase, Log/Phase, Real/Imag, R+jX,
G+jB.
Polar coordianates :The polar coordinate format is used to view the amplitude and phase of the reflection coefficientsin S11 measurements.
The radial line show the phase angle of the reflected signal.The right-most position corresponds
to the zero-phase angle (that is, the reflected signal has the same phase as the incident signal).
The phase differences of 90°, ±180°, and -90°correspond to the top, leftmost, and bottom of
the polar display, respectively.
In Polar coordinates, 3 marker formats are supported： Lin/Phase, Log/Phase, Real/Imag.

5.1.3

Command Format:CALCulate#[:SELected]:FORMat:CALCulate#[:SELected]:FORMat?

Instruction

Sets/gets the data format on the selected trace

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

MLOGarithmic, MLINear, SWR, PHASe, GDELay,
Smith chart:
SLINear, SLOGarithmic, SCOMplex, SMITh (R+jX), SADMittance(G+jB)

Return

MLG|MLIN|SWR|PHAS|GDEL|SMIT|POL|
SLIN|SLOG|SCOM|SMIT|SADM
PLIN|PLOG|POL

ExampleCALCulate:FORMat SWR

Output power

Output power refers to the output power of the analyzer at Port 1. The default output for this setting is
0 dbm, which is the maximum power. In general, when measuring passive high loss device, highoutput power should be used to facilitate the signal principle noise base. For device that is sensitive tohigh power levels, such as amplifiers, low output power should be used.

Command Format:SOURce#:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]:SOURce#:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]?

Instruction

Set/get the output power

Parameter Type

Float, unitless

Parameter Range-40dB ~ 0 dB

Return

Float

Example:SOURce1:POWer -20

www.siglent.com

127

SHA850A User Manual

5.1.4

Port extention

The port extention function is a good method to eliminate the error of test fixtures. The calibration of S
parameters is usually carried out by the user at the plane where the RF cable is connected to the test
fixture, typically a connector (SMA, N-type, etc…). The actual device to be tested is located in the test
fixture. The device to be tested and the test fixture are generally connected by microstrip line. As aresult, the actual measurement plane of the device to be tested does not coincide with the calibrationreference plane (the connector, as mentioned previously) which will introduce calibration errors.
After the S parameters calibration is performed, the reference plane can be extended to the specified
measurement plane by simply adding the added microstrip line length, speed factor, loss, and otherparameters in the settting interface, to carry out more accurate testing.
Manual port extention operation steps :1.

Perform the appropriate calibration type on the associated cabling before entering Port
Extensions.

2.

Select Meas -> Port Extention to enter the Settings menu.

3.

Select the port that needs to be extended, input the velocity factor. Different speed
coefficients lead to different transmission speeds of the electromagnetic waves intransmission lines and different transmission time.

Notes: Input the length of the transmission line and the port delay will be automatically calculated, andinput the port delay time then the length will be automatically calculated.

128

Command Format:CORRection:EXTension:CORRection:EXTension?

Instruction

Set/get the port extension stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CORRection:EXTension ON

Command Format:CORRection:EXTension:PORT[1]|2:TIME:CORRection:EXTension:PORT[1]|2:TIME?

Instruction

Set/get the Electric delay

Parameter Type

Float，Unit:sParameter Range-10s ~10s

Return

Float

Example:CORRection:EXTension:PORT1:TIME 0.0002

Command Format:CORRection:EXTension:AUTO:PORT

Instruction

Set the port1 auto extension

Example:CORRection:EXTension:AUTO:PORT

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.2

Command Format:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX?

Instruction

Set/get the Velocity factor

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.1~1

Return

Float

Example:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX 0.2

Frequence range

Frequency range is the span of frequencies you specify for making a device measurement.
Note:
Center: Specify a center frequency of the swept measurement range
Start: Specify the starting frequency of the swept measurement range
Stop: Specify the end frequency of the swept measurement range
Span: Specify the swept measurement frequency range.When setting the frequency span, it will
set start/stop frequency around center. It can also be set to zero span.When switching to Zerospan mode, it will memorize the current span and set to center frequency.When it is set to Spanmode again, it will resume the last frequency range.

Command Format:FREQuency:STARt:FREQuency:STARt?

Instruction

Sets the start frequency
Gets the start frequency

Parameter Type

Float,unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

100KHz~7.4999999GHz
Zero Span: 100.5KHz~7.5GHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:STARt 1.0GHz

Command Format:FREQuency:STOP:FREQuency:STOP?

Instruction

Sets the stop frequency
Gets the stop frequency

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

100.1KHz~7.5GHz
Zero Span: 100.5KHz~7.5GHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0GHz

Command Format:FREQuency:SPAN:FREQuency:SPAN?

www.siglent.com

129

SHA850A User Manual

5.3

Instruction

Sets the frequency span.Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer
into zero span
Gets span value

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0Hz, 100Hz~7.499999GHz

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:SPAN 1.0GHz

Command Format[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:SPAN:SWEPT[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO?

Instruction

Sets the frequency span to zero span
Sets the frequency span to last span
Gets whether current span is zero span

ReturnFloat, unit:Hz

Example:FREQuency:STOP 1.0GHz

BW

Use averaging to help smooth a trace and reduce the effects of random noise on a measurement. It
will average the multiple sweep results of every point according to the average times setting.The
higher the number of average times, the more dandom noise is eliminated.
Click BW→Averaging/Avg Times to enable averaging and set average times.
When the Averaging is enabled, the number of sweeps currently used for averaging and the averagetimes are displayed on the left statusbar.

130

Command Format[:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe]?

Instruction

Set/query the average stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:Average 1

Command Format[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt?

Instruction

Set/query the average number

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~999

ReturnInteger

Example:Average:COUNt 25

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.4

Sweep

5.4.1

PointsData points are the number of data samples representing the measured values at a single excitation
value.When specifying the sweep points, the sweep time of the vector network analyzer varies
proportionally with the number of points. More sweep points will increase measurement resolution,affect the minimum sweep time, increase the time of both data processing and remote access to data,
and reduce the reponse rate as well.
The number of data points collected by the network analyzer during the measurement sweep can be
set to any number between 101 and 10001.

5.4.2

Sweep Time &Sweep Time Rules

Sweep time is automatically set according to the Sweep points by default.When Sweep time mode isauto, the fastest response time that analyzer need to configure the hardware and collect every single
point data is calculated and applied.
When measuring long lengths of cable, you can slow the seep time so that more stable and reliable
waveform can be observed.
Note: Setting the sweep time manually will change the sweep time mode.

Command Format:SWEep:TIME:SWEep:TIME?

Instruction

Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display.
A span value of 0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode.
In zero span the X-axis represents time rather than frequency

Parameter Type

Float,unit: ks, s, ms, us

Parameter Range

1us ~ 1500s

ReturnFloat, unit:s

Example:SWEep:TIME 5s

Command Format:SWEep:TIME:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1:SWEep:TIME:AUTO?

Instruction

This command turn on/off auto sweep time stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:SWEep:TIME:AUTO ON

5.4.3

Sweep/Measure

Sweep/Measure:
Single/Continue，controls analyzer to perform single or continuous sweep/measure.This setting isContinue by default.
www.siglent.com

131

SHA850A User Manual

Restart:Restart the current sweep or measure.In particular, if the sweep parameters are modified, a restart will
be performed.Sweep parameters include frequency, sweep , average settings.

Command Format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instruction

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restart the current sweep.

Example:INITiate:IMMediate

5.5

Amplitude

5.5.1

RF AttenSet the RF attenuation of Port2 in S21 measurement so that receiver distortion caused by high-power
measurement can be avoided.

5.5.2

Y AxisUse the settings “Scale”, “Reference Level”, and “Reference Position” Settings (as well as the format)
determine how the data trace will appear on the analyzer screen.
5.5.2.1 Scale
Sets the vertical indexing value of the rectangular coordinate display format. In polar coordinates andSmith chart formats, the scale sets the value of the outer perimeter.
Range: 0.001 dB/div to 1000 dB/div

132

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1||2|3|4|:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1||2|3|4|:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instruction

Sets/gets the scale on selected trace

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.001 dB ~ 1000 dB

ReturnFloat, unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:PDIVision 10 dB

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.5.2.2 Reference level
Sets the value of the guide in rectangular format.In polar coordinates and Smith’s circle chart formats.
The reference level does not apply.
Range: -1000 dB to 1000 dB
Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4|:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4|:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

Sets/gets the reference level on selected trace

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

0.001 dB ~ 1000 dB

ReturnFloat, unit dB

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y: RLEVel 10 dB

5.5.2.3 Reference position
Sets the position of the guide in Rectangular coordinate format. Zero is the bottom line and 10 is the
top line. The default position is 5 (middle of the screen). Reference postions do not apply in polar
coordinates and Smith chart formats.

5.5.3

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition?

Instruction

Sets/gets the reference position on selected trace

Parameter TypeInt

Parameter Range

0~ 10

ReturnInt

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y: RPOSition 5

Auto Scaling

Automatic scaling:
Automatically sets the vertical indexing value and reference value to fit the working data trace in thescreen grid area. The reference position is not affected. The analyzer determines the minimum
possible scaling factor that will allow all display data to appear on the 80% vertical grid. The selectedreference values center the trace on the screen.

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

Instruction

Do auto scale on selected trace

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe2:Y:AUTO

All autoscaling:
Automatically scales all data traces in the working window to fit vertically into the grid area of thescreen.

www.siglent.com

133

SHA850A User Manual

5.6
5.6.1

Trace
Num of Traces

In Vector Network Analyzer mode, the analyzer allows for up to four traces to be displayed at thesame time. Each trace has its own color (Trace 1 – Yellow, Trace 2 – Purple, Trace 3 – cyan, Trace D- Green). Select specific trace to set parameter independently.

Figure 5-1 trace

As shown in the figure, Multiple traces are stacked and displayed in the waveform area. Basic
information of each trace is shown on the left and it is a shortcut to perform quick operation and set
trace parameters. The coordinate axis of waveform area will stay consistent with the current selectedtrace.

5.6.2

Command Format:CALCulate#:PARameter:COUNt:CALCulate#:PARameter:COUNt?

Instruction

Sets/gets the number of the traces

Parameter Type

int

Parameter Range

1~4

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt 1

Select Trace

Select certain trace to configure the corresponding trace settings like Format, Display Type, etc.

134

Command Format:CALCulate#:PARameter:SELect

Instruction

Sets current selected tracewww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.6.3

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4
A|B|C|D
1|2|3|4

ReturnTRACE1|TRACE2|TRACE3|TRACE4

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:SELect 1

Memory Trace

The analyzer supports saving the current data-trace in memory. It can perform four kinds ofmathematical operations on the current data-trace and memory trace. When the mathermaticaloperation with memory trace needs to be carried out, the current data needs to be stored in memory
first.
5.6.3.1 Trace Type
Go to Trace menu, Click Data→Memory to complete the storage operation.
Command Format:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:MEMorize

Instruction

Memorize the data from current trace

Example:CALCulate:MATH:MEMorize

If memory trace data was valid, In the Display menu bar, you can select four display modes: Display
data-trace only, display memory trace ,display data-trace and memory trace at the same time anddisplay off.
Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets data-trace to open or off

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe2:STATe 1

Command Format:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:MEMory[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe|1|2|3|4:MEMory[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets mem-trace to open or off

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe2:MEMory 1

5.6.3.2 Math
The four mathematical operations of data-trace and memory trace are as follows, in which the values
on data-trace and memory trace are linear:www.siglent.com

135

SHA850A User Manual

Data/Memory: Divide the measured data by the data in the stored trace.This function can be used to
calculate the ratio of two traces (such as calculating gain or attunuation) , which can also be regarded
as the normalization operation of test data.
Data*Memory: The current measurement data is multiplied by the data in memory.
Data+Memory: Current measurement data plus data in memory.
Data-Memory: Current measurement data minus data in memory. For example, you can use thisfunction to store measured data. The error is then substracted from the DUT measurement.

5.6.4

Command Format:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion
OFF|DIVide|MULtiply|SUBtract|ADD:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion?

Instruction

Sets/gets mathematical operations on current trace

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF | DIVide | Multiply | SUBtract | ADD

ReturnEnumeraiton, OFF|DIVide|MULtiply|SUBtract|ADD

Example:CALculate:MATH:FUNC DIVide

Hold Trace

Trace hold types include Clear Write, Max Hold. Using this function, The system calculates the
sampled data using a specific operation method according to the trace hold type selected operationand displays the result.
⚫

Clear Write: Erases any data previously stored in the selected trace, and display the data
sampled in real-time of each point on the trace.

⚫

Max Hold: Retain the maximum level for each point of the selected trace. Update the data if a new
maximum level is detected in successive sweeps.

⚫

Min Hold: Display the minimum value from multiple sweeps for each point of the trace and update
the data if a new minimum is generated in successive sweeps.

Based on frames, trace hold calculation operate new data and historical data point by point.Therefore
modifying trace hold type, frequencies, points and other parameters will cause sweep to restart andrecalculate. The first frame after rescanning is considered as no historical data, and the Clear Write
logic is implemented by default.

136

Command Format:TRACe|1|2|3|4:HOLD:TRACe|1|2|3|4:HOLD?

Instruction

Sets/gets trace hold type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF | MAX | MIN

ReturnEnumeraiton, OFF|MAX|MIN

ExampleTRACe1:HOLD MAX

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.7

Marker & Peak

5.7.1

Marker Settings

The marker appears as a rhombic sign for identifying points on a trace. You can easily read theamplitude, frequency of the marked point on the trace.The analyzer allows for up to seven markers
and one reference marker to be displayed on one trace.
5.7.1.1 Select Marker
Press the Marker button on the front panel and go to Marker menu. If there is no active marker,
Marker1 will be automatically turned on. Click Select Marker to select desired marker.When a marker
is selected, you can set its type, trace to be markerd, X values and other related parameters. The
enabled marker will appear on the trace selected trought the Select Trace option and themeasurement value of the marker will be displayed at the top right of the window, the value format is
the same as the format of the trace.
5.7.1.2 Marker TypeThree types of marker are supported as follow:
Normal:
It is used to measure the X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) values of a certain point on
the trace. When selected, a marker with the number of the current marker (such as “1”) appearson the trace. If there is no active marker exists currently, a marker will be enabled automatically at
the center frequency of the current trace.If selected marker has been opened and configured
before, reopen the marker will set to the previous X values.
Note: The readout resolution of the X-axis (frequency or time) is related to the span. For higher
readout resolution, reduce the span.

Delta:
It is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) between thereference point and a certain point on the trace. When selected, a pair of markers appear on the
trace Fixed Reference marker (marked by letter “R”) and the Delta Marker (marked by the “Δ”,
such as “Δ1”)
Note: After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delat measurement
marker, and the reference marker will automatically turn on. The readout information on current
Delat marker will show the frequency (or time) difference and amplitude difference compared to
the Reference Marker’s value.

Off:
Turn off the marker currently selected. The marker information displayed on the screen andfunctions based on the marker will also be turned off.

www.siglent.com

137

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/gets marker type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition|DELTa|OFF

ReturnPOS|DELT||OFF

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:MODE POSition

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets marker on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:STATe ON

Note: Marker 8 equals reference marker, which can not be set to Delta Marker type.

Command Format: CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

Instruction

Sets all marker type to Off

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF

5.7.1.3 Marker X
Displays and sets the x-axis position of the marker. The unit of readout values is identical to thecurrent x-axis. For instance, When the span mode is zero span, the unit is time, and when the spanmode is span, the unit is frequency.
When setting marker X value, it can only be set within the range of the current X axis.When themeasurement range/span changes, the exceeding Marker will be set to the current measurement startvalue or stop value, depending on whether the Marker X value exceeds the start value or stop value.

138

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X?

Instruction

Sets/gets marker X value
This command is effective only when the marker mode is not Off
Use command below to set marker mode/type::CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE

Parameter TypeFrequency, Float, Unit Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz, default to Hz
Time, Float, Unit us, ms, s, ks, default to s

Parameter Range

100kHz to max frequency or 10ms ~ 1000s

ReturnFrequency, Float, Unit Hz;
Time, Float, UInit s;

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 0.4 GHz:CALCulate:MARKer4:X 200 ms:CALCulate:MARKer4:X?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?

Instruction

gets marker Y value
When the data format is Smith/Polar, there are multiple returned values
depending on the specific Smith/Polar Type.

ReturnLogMag, Float, unit dB; Phase, Float, unit degree;
SWR, Float, unitless(U); Group Delay, Float, time(s);LinMag, Float, unitless(U)Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:Y?
Return : -25

5.7.1.4 Marker Couple
When Marker Couple is on, Markers are set up and moved in coupled operation on all traces.
When Marker Couple is off, Markers are set up and moved independently for each trace.

5.7.2

Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Couple on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle 1:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle?

Marker Function

The marker function provides a method for further processing the current marker data to achieve
specific results or make the measurement results more accurate.
5.7.2.1 N dB BW
Enable the N dB BW measurement or set the value of N dB. The N dB BW denotes the frequency
difference between two points that are located on both sides of the current marker and with N dB fall
(N Less than or equal to 0) or rise (N>0) in amplitude as shown in the figure on the next page.
When the measurement starts, the analyzer will search for the two points which are located at bothsides of the current point with N dB fall or rise in amplitude and display the frequency difference
between the two points in the active function area. "----" would be displayed if the search fails.
The parameters in the figure are shown as:

www.siglent.com

139

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 5-2 N dB marker

Note: When the N dB BW function is turned on, if the current marker is off, the marker type of thecurrent selected marker will automatically change to Normal. The function will be closed if the marker
is turned off.

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker N ddB BW N value

Parameter Type

LogMag, Float, Unit dB;
Phase, Float, Unit degree;
LinMag, Floag Unitless U;

Parameter Range

LogMag, -100 dB to 100 dB;
LinMag, -100 kU to 100 kU;
Phase, -360°to 360°;

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:NDB 10 dB

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?

Instruction

Gets the result of N dB BW calculation

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:BANDwidth:RESult?

5.7.2.2 Discrete Marker
Due to the limited number of ampling points set on the trace, the data of other points except the
sampling points are based on the interpolation value of the sampling point data, which is approximate
to the actual data, not the real measured data. By setting Discrete Marker, the value of the marker can
only be taken at sampling point, which ensures that the marker’s value is from the measurement dataand not interpolated data.
Click the Discrete to select the On option, at this time, the data of the marker is only selected from thesampling point. This setting is default to Off.
140

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DISCrete:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DISCrete?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Discrete funtion stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:MARK1:DISCrete 1

5.7.2.3 Marker→
Set Other Parameters according to current Marker.
Marker->Center Freq:
Set the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer

Instruction

Set the marker position (X coordinate) as the center frequency.
Valid when the marker is on.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CENTer

Marker->Start Freq:
Set the start frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START

Instruction

Set the marker position (X coordinate) as the start frequency
Valid when the marker is on.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:START

Marker->Stop Freq:
Set the stop frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the current marker.
Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP

Instruction

Set the marker position (X coordinate) as the stop frequency
Valid when the marker is on.

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:STOP

Note: Funtions listed above are not available in Zero span.

ΔMarer->Span:
This function is only available when the current marker is a Delta Marker. Set the sweeping range
between the current marker position and the reference marker position (frequency).
Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN

Instruction

Sets the difference between the delta marker and reference marker tocurrent sweep span
Use Comman below to set marker type to DELTa:

www.siglent.com

141

SHA850A User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE
Example

5.7.3:CALCulate:MARKer2:DELTa:SPAN

Peak

5.7.3.1 Peak Search
Open the peak setting menu and execute peak search. Press Peak to search for positive value whichis greater than the measured value at both ends of a span. Press Valley to perform the oppsite
search.

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum

Instruction

Marker searches for peaks on the selected trace and marks them withthe current selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:MAXimum

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Minimum

Instruction

Marker searches for valleys on the selected trace and marks them withthe current selected marker

Example:CALCulate:MARKer4:Minimum

5.7.3.2 Continuous Peak/Valley
Enable or disable continuous peak search. The default is Off. When enabled, the system will alwayse
execute a peak search automatically after each sweep in order to track the signal undermeasurement.
Note: Each trace only supports one pair of marker to perform continuous peak/valley. For example, if
certain marker is doing Continuous Peak, set other marker Continous Peak to on will automatically
set the previous one to Off.

142

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Continue Peak Search On/Off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CPSEarch ON

Command Format:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch[:STATe]?

Instruction

Sets/gets Marker Continue Valley Search On/Off stateParameter Type

Booleanwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:MARKer1:CVSEarch ON

5.7.3.3 Peak→
Peak->Center: Perform a peak search on the current marker and set the marker frequency to center
frequency.
Valley->Center: Perform a valley search on the current marker and set the marker frequency tocenter frequency.

5.8

Limit

Limit Line is a test form that can visualize test data and results. The limit test compares the measured
data with the defined limit and provides the qualified or unqualified judgment information of eachmeasured data point. Limit line and limit test are only available in LogMag/LinMag data format.When
the trace that has limit working on switching to other data format, the limit will automatically set todisable.

5.8.1

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:STATe?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit test on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

ON|OFF|0|1

Return0|!

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:STATe OFF

Limit Edit

Click Limit to the limit menu, Enable certain Limit so that Limit Edit submenu is valid. In Limit Edit,
you can set limit type, limit mode and modify/ load/ save the limit data.

www.siglent.com

143

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 5-3 limit edit

Limit Type:Set the limit type as upper/lower. This setting is default to Upper.
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit type

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

UPPer|LOWer

Return

UPP|LOW

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: UPPer

Limit Mode:
Set Whether the limit line is a straight flat line or a polyline connected by limit points. This setting isdefault to Line.
When the limit mode is Line, only setting the limit line amplitude is required. When the limit mode is
Point, Use add/delete point button in the menu, and set both X and Y value of each point by selecting
the specific limit point or directly touch the screen in the limit table to select and set points. Afterchanging the X value of a limit point, the limit points list will be sorted from small to large by X value.

Use the following command to set limit mode:

144

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit mode

Parameter Type

Enumerationwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Parameter Range

LINE|POINt

ReturnLINE|POINt

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1: UPPer

Use the following command to set limit line amplitude:
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINE[1]|2:LINE:CALCulate:LLINE[1]|2:LINE?

Instruction

Sets/gets limit line amplitude value

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range-150 ddB to 150

Return

Float

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:LINE 50

Use the following command to add/set limit point data,
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt#:DATA val1,val2:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt#:DATA?
:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINt:ADD val1,val2

Instruction

Sets/gets a specific point data,if point index is greater than the list size,
the command will not take effect.
Add a point after the current points list

Parameter Type

val1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Parameter Range

val1:related with Spanval2:-150 to 150

Returnval1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINt:ADD 100,-20,200,-25
That means add two points: (100,-20) , (200, -25)
:CALCulate::LLINe2:POINt4: 100,-20
That means change point4 to (100,-20)

Use the following command to set all limit points
Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINts:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:POINts?

Instruction

Sets/gets all limie points
This command will erase the previous limit points and set with input
valuesParameter Type

val1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Parameter Range

val1:related with Spanval2:-150 to 150

Returnval1:Float,frequency
val2:Float,amplitude

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:POINts 100,-20,200,-25,300,-30

Use the following command to delete limit point/points:

www.siglent.com

145

SHA850A User Manual

5.8.2

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe#:POINt#:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe#:POINts:DELete

Instruction

Delete certain limit’s certain/all limit points

Example:CALCulate:LLINe1:POINt1:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe1:POINts:DELete

Limit Test

Limit Test: According to the Enabled limit, start/stop test on the selected trace.
⚫

If limit Test is set On, a pass/fail sign will appear on top of grid area which indicates whether thecurrent trace passed the limit test. When there are two limits taking effect on different trace, thelimit result will be result1 & result2.

⚫

If you add two limit points and the X values are the same but Y values are not, the smaller Y
value will be tested when the limit type is Upper and otherwise the opposite.

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST?

Instruction

Sets/gets the on/off state of limit test switch

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate”LLINe:TEST 1

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:FAIL?

Instruction

Query the current result of certain limit

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe2:FAIL1

5.8.2.1 Buzzer
Open/close buzzer function.When the Buzzer is set to On and the test result is fail, buzzer will make ashort beep.

Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP?

Instruction

Sets/gets the Buzzer on/off stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP OFF

Attention: If the Buzzer is set to off in system settings, despite turning on the buzzer in limit test , it will
not beep when test fails.
146

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.8.2.2 Fail to Stop
This Funtion meets the demand to observe the failure result. When the fail to stop is set to on and thetest fails, it will stop the sweep.

5.9Command Format:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP?

Instruction

Set/get the fail to stop stateParameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP OFF

Caibration

Due to the systematic errors, cabling, adapters, probes and more, the DUT ususally can’t bemeasured directly and accurately. These errors are caused by leakage signals inside the instrument,by the frequency response of the receivers, and by reflections inside the instrument that interact with
the DUT. It is necessary to introduce calibration compensation to help achieve higher accuracy. Aftercalibration, the S parameter calibration is applied to the calculation results and the errors are removed
from subsequent measurements.

5.9.1

Definitions

DUT(Devie Under Test)The Cable, antenna, transmission line, amplifier, filter, or anything else that isconnected to the SHA802X that is to be measured.
Calibration Standards – OPEN, SHORT, LOAD, and THRU
OPEN,SHORT,and LOAD are ‘reflection’ standards that are used during calibration. When an RF
signal ‘hits’ these components, the signals are reflected in a predictable manner. These components
can also be used to terminate a DUT port during some measurements.
SHORT and OPEN standards both cause 100% of an RF signal to be reflected. The difference
between these two standards is what happens to the phase of the reflected signal. Although an OPEN
standard is a precision component, simply leaving nothing connected at the end of a cable can be areasonable substitute for an OPEN.
A LOAD standard absorbs almost ALL of the incident signal and very little signal is reflected back tothe source.
A THRU standard is used during some calibration steps to connect PORT1 to PORT2 in place of the
DUT. A Flush THRU connection can be made when the cables that connect with the DUT can matewith each other. Otherwise, any reasonably short cable can be used as a THRU standard.
Calbration Reference Plane is the point(or points) at which the DUT and cal standards areconnected during a calibration. This can be at the FiedFox test port connectors, or at the end of
jumper cables or adapters.

www.siglent.com

147

SHA850A User Manual

5.9.2

Calibration Kit

5.9.2.1 Standard Cal Kit
The analyzer provides a variety of default calibration kit standards, including F503, F603, F504, F604,
85032F, 85032B/E, 85032D/E.
Select correct Cal Kit gender so that correct Cal Kit data is applied in calibration. Please refer to thedata manual of coaxial calibration kit for detailed Cal Kit parameters and applicable scenarios.
The Document URL is as follow:
https://siglentna.com/wp-content/uploads/dlm_uploads/2021/04/Mechanical-Calibration-Kit-Datasheet-v1.4.pdf

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel?

Instruction

Set/get the current cal kit

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range\"F503E\ " , \"F603E\" , \"F504S\" ,\"F604S\" ,\"85032F\" , \"85032B/E\" , \"85033D/E\"\"User1\" , \"User2\"

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel \"85032F\"

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer?

Instruction

Sets/gets the male/female properties of the current calibration suite

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

MALE|FEMAle

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer MALE

5.9.2.2 User Kit
When the user are using standards (or combinations of standards) that are different from thepredefined standard Cal Kits,for example, using three offset SHORTS instead of an OPEN, SHORT,
and Load to perform a 1-port calibration, it requires users to create custom User calibration kits.
Operation Instructions:
Press Cal -> Cal Kit -> User1/User2, edit types, delays and OPEN/SHORT standard samples tocreate cusrom kit.

148

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

5.9.3

Calibration Type5.9.3.1 Open Response Calibration
when a single port is used for open-circuit response calibration, the reflection tracking error in the error
model of the test device can be calculated by only connecting the OPEN calibration element or evensimply NOTHING to the test port. If the Load calibration element is used for isolation calibration at thesame time, the directional error can be calculated.
Calibration Steps :1.

Preset the instrument.

2.

Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Open Cal

4.

Connect the OPEN calibration element to the test port according to the interface prompts,
click Open for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface after calibration,complete the calibration, and save the calibration data.

5.9.3.2 Short Circuit Response Calibration :Like the open-circuit response calibration, the single-port short-circuit response is connected to theport with the SHORT calibrarion element, and the reflection tracking error can be calculated. If the
Load calibration element is used for isolation calibration at the same time, the directional error can becalculated.
Calibration Steps :1.

Preset the instrument.

2.

Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band, Cal Kit and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Short Cal

4.

Connect the SHORT calibration element to the Port 1 according to the interface prompts,
click Short for calibration, and click Finish to exit the calibration interface after calibration,complete the calibration, and save the calibration data.

5.9.3.3 Full 1-Port OSL calibration :All 1-port OSL calibration connects the OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD calibration elements to the test
ports in turn to calculate the reflection tracking error, directional error, and source matching error in therror model of the test device.
Calibration Steps :1.

Preset the instrument.

www.siglent.com

149

SHA850A User Manual2.

Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal -> Calibrate -> 1-Port Cal

4.

Connect the OPEN calibration element to the Port 1 according to the interface prompts andclick Open for calibration. Wait till the sweep is complete then connect the SHORT
calibration element to the Port 1, click Short for calibration. Wait till the sweep is complete
then connect the LOAD calibration element to the Port 1, click the Load for calibration. Afterthe calibration, click FINISH to exit the calibration inter face , complete the calibration, andsave the calibration data.

5.9.3.4 Transimission Response Calibration:
Two-port transmission response calibration is to connect the THRU calibration kit between Port1 andPort2 to calculate the transmission tracking error in the test device error model.
Calibration Steps :1.

Preset the instrument.

2.

Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Response-Thru Cal

4.

Connect the THRU calibration element between Port1 and Port2, click Thru for calibration,and click Finish to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration, and save thecalibration data.

5.9.3.5 Enhanced Response Calibration:
Two-port enhanced response calibration connects the Thru calibration element between two ports,
and connects the Open, Short, and Load on one port for calibration.
Calibration Steps :1.

Preset the instrument.

2.

Set internal source output power, sweep points, test frequency band , Cal Kit and otherparameters.

3.

Select Cal -> Calibrate -> Enhanced-Res Cal

4.

Connect OPEN, SHORT, and LOAD on the Port 1 and press corresponding button tocomplete the calibration successively, and then connect the THRU calibration kit between
the two ports to perform the Thru calibration. After the calibration is completed, click Finish
to exit the calibration interface, complete the calibration and save the calibration data.

After the calibration is complete and data is successfully saved, Corresponding compensation apply

150

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

button Apply xxx Cali will appear in the menu. Set on/off to control whether applys the calibration
data or not.
Here’s commands for calibration:
Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets/gets the cal type

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

NONE|OPEN|SHORT|1PORT|THRU|ENHAnced|E11|E21

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE SHORT

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN

Instruction

Collecting open step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt

Instruction

Collecting short step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD

Instruction

Collecting load step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:THRU

Instruction

Collecting through step data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:THRU 1

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE

Instruction

After the calibration procedure is completed, the calibration data is saved andappliedExample:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE 1

Notice: Highest measurement accuracy is achieved when the frequency range or sweep settings
remain the same during the measurement as when the calibration is performed. If these settingschange after the calibration, SHA802X will interpolate the calibration so that it can still make VERY
accurate measurement.
Interpolated Calibrations are only slightly less accurate than a calibration performed at themeasurement settings. When a calibration that you performed is being interpolated, a questionmark
will be added to the Cal annotation. For example: S11:C? is shown on the screen when the current
Response or Mechanical cal is being interpolated. In order to achive better measurement accuracy, it
is recommended to recalibrate after changing the sweep-relevent settings.

www.siglent.com

151

SHA850A User Manual

5.9.4

Ecal

Ecal is an automatic calibration technology for VNA mode. Every ECal module contains electronic
standards that are automatically switched into position during a measurement calibration. Theseelectronic standards have been measured at athe factory and the data stored within the memory of
the ECal module. The analyzer uses this stored data, along with the measured data, to calculated theerror terms for a measurement calibration. Ecal offers the following advantages compared to
Mechanical calibration kit:
1.

The calibration process is simple. The electronic calibrator only needs to be connected to the
SHA802X once to complete the test items required by the dual-port calibration, without theneed for multiple calibration connections.

2.

A shorter time is required for calibration.

3.

There are fewer uncertain factors in the calibration process, and the probability of electroniccalibration being affected by misoperation is reduced because there is no need for multiple
connection processes.

Ecal Calibtration Steps:
1.

Connect the USB port on the ECal module with the USB port of SHA802X via a USB cable.
When the Ecal module indicator switch to “Ready”, it indicates the Ecal module has enteredideal working condition/temperature. After connect the module, the type of module,
frequency range, and connector type are automatically recoginized.

2.

Press Cal->Ecal Info to view all parameters of the characterization stored in the ECal
module.

Figure 5-4 Ecal Information

152

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

In the figure above, you can see the date of production, frequency range, Number of Points
and Connector type.

3.

Click Load Ecal to start loading the data of selected Measurement characteristics to the
SHA802X. If it is loaded before, then it will compare with saved data for consistency.

4.

Click Calibrate▼, Select S11 ECal or S21 Ecal to perform 1 port or two ports calibration
respectively. Connect the calibration part and instrument port correctly according to thecalibration prompt, click Enter to automatically calibrate then click Finish to save and apply
the calibration data.

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:ECAL?

Instruction

Check whether the electronic calibration part is connected to the instrument

ReturnBoolean , 0|1

Example:CORR:COLL:METH:ECAL?

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE?

Instruction

Set/query electronic calibration parts available electronic standard sample data

Parameter Typeenumeration

Parameter Range

Determined by electronic calibration part Return
example:Factory User1

Returnenumeration

Example:CORRection:COLLect:ECal:MODULE Factory

Command Format:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:CANCEL

Instruction

Execute/cancel the electronic calibration part to load the current selected
electronic standard sample data

Example:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD

www.siglent.com

153

SHA850A User Manual

6

Modulation Analyzer Mode

MA mode includes digital modulation analysis (DMA) and analog modulation analysis (AMA). Press
Mode key to select and add the expected mode to window management.
Press Meas Setup key to enter the corresponding measurement parameter configuration menu.
According to the actual needs, select the required parameter configuration options, obtain thecorresponding output waveform and observe the analysis results.

6.1

Digital Modulation Analysis (DMA)

Through digital signal analysis, a series of indicators such as error vector magnitude, magnitude error,
and phase error can be obtained.

6.1.1

Settings

6.1.1.1 Average|Hold times
Average|Hold Times N, is the counter when the trace type is "average", "max hold" and "min hold". Ina single measurement (Single), and any valid trace type is "average", "max hold" or "min hold", thesweep stops when the counter reaches N.
Larger (average|hold) times can reduce the influence of noise or other random signals, thereby
highlighting stable signal characteristics in the signal.

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the average measurement status
Query the average measurement status

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:AVERage ON

Command format[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt?

Instructions

Set the average number of measurements
Query the average number of measurements

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1 ~ 1000

ReturnInteger

Example:AVERage:COUNt 20

6.1.1.2 Statistic
Turn on the statistics function, the measurement results will display the maximum and minimum
values of the statistics, turn off the statistics function, the measurement results will only display the154

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manualreal-time measurement value. Statistics are disabled by default.

After performing a remeasurement, the statistical results will be cleared and the statistics will berestarted. If the averaging function is turned on, the average calculation of the measurement results
will also be cleared and restarted.

6.1.2

Command format[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe?

Instructions

Set digital demodulation measurement statistics status
Query the statistical status of digital demodulation measurements

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:STATistic:STATeON

Command format:CALCulate:RESTart

Instructions

Restart the statistical measurements

Example:CALCulate:RESTart

Demod

6.1.2.1 Demod Type & Format
Modulation types are as follows:
QAM modulation : 8QAM , 16QAM , 32QAM , 64QAM , 128QAM , 256QAM
PSK modulation : BPSK , QPSK , 8PSK , DBPSK , DQPSK , D8PSK , pi/4 DQPSK , pi/8 DQPSK ,OQPSKFSK modulation : 2FSK , 4FSK , 8FSK , MSK
ASK modulation : 2ASKCommand format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation?

Instructions

Sets the digital demodulation type
Gets the digital demodulation type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

ASK2
MSK
BPSK
QPSK
PSK8
DBPSK
DQPSK
DPSK8

www.siglent.com

155

SHA850A User Manual

OQPSK
PI4DQ
PI8D8
QAM16
QAM32
QAM64
QAM128
QAM256
FSK2
FSK4
FSK8
FSK16
ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:MODulation FSK8

Command format:READ:DDEMod?

Instructions

Obtain digital demodulation results
if demod type is ASK it will return:
ASK err rms (% rms)
ASK err peak (% pk)
symbol position of ASK err peakcarrier power
carrier offset
ASK depth
If demod type is FSK it will return:
1.FSK err rms (% rms)
2.FSK err peak (% pk)
3.symbol position of FSK err peak
4. carrier power
5.carrier offset
6.FSK deviation
If If demod type is MSK,PSK,QAM it will return:
1. EVM rms (% rms)
2. EVM peak (% pk)
3. symbol position of EVM peak
4.magnitude error rms (% rms).
5. magnitude error peak (% pk)
6.symbol position of magnitude error peak
7.phase error rms (deg)8.phase error peak (deg pk)
9.symbol position of phase error peak
10. frequency error (Hz)
11. IQ offset
12. SNR(MER) (dB)
13. quadrature error (deg)
14. gain imbalance (dB)156

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnStringExample:READ:DDEMod?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.1.2.2 Symbol Rate
Set the analyzer symbol rate (symbols per second) to match the system (signal).
The symbol rate setting is limited by the analyzer maximum bandwidth (BW_max).
Command format:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe?

Instructions

Sets the digital demodulation symbol rate
Read digital demodulation symbol rate

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

1000 ~ 25000000
The sign point is 4 , Maximum sign rate is 25e6
The sign point is 6 , Maximum sign rate is 25e6
The sign point is 8 , Maximum sign rate is 18.75e6
The sign point is 10 , Maximum sign rate is 15e6
The sign point is 12 , Maximum sign rate is 12.5e6
The sign point is 14 , Maximum sign rate is 10.714285e6
The sign point is 16 , Maximum sign rate is 9.375e6

ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:SRATe 2000

6.1.2.3 Points / Symbol
Sets the number of points for demodulating each symbol. The settable values are 2, 4, 8, 10, 12, 14,
and 16.
Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts?

Instructions

Sets digital demodulation symbol points
Query digital demodulation symbol points

Parameter type

Discrete

Parameter Range

4 , 6 , 8 , 10 , 12 , 14 , 16

ReturnDiscrete

ExampleDDEMod:SYMBol:POINts 14

6.1.2.4 Meas Interval
Set the length of digital demodulation analysis and display.
Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth?

Instructions

Set digital demodulation measurement length
Get digital demodulation measurement length

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

16 ~ 4096

ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:RLENgth 200

www.siglent.com

157

SHA850A User Manual

6.1.2.5 Constelletion Setting
Edit the symbol order of constellation positions.

6.1.3

Filter

6.1.3.1 Meas Filter
Enable and select Meas Filter.
Meas Filters that can be set include:⚫

Sqrt Nyquist⚫

Nyquist

⚫

Gauss

⚫

Half Sine

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement]?

Instructions

Set up digital demodulation measurement filter
Obtain digital demodulation measurement filter

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
RRCosine
RECTangle
GAUSsian
HSIN

Return0|1

Example:DDEMod:FILTer HSIN

6.1.3.2 Ref Filter
Enable and select Ref Filter.
Ref Filters that can be set include:⚫

Sqrt Nyquist⚫

Nyquist

⚫

Gauss

⚫

Half Sine

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence？

Instructions

158

Sets the digital demodulation reference filter

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Query digital demodulation reference filter
Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

OFF
RRCosine
RECTangle
GAUSsian
HSIN

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerenceOFF

6.1.3.3 Filter Length
Sets the filter length used by the analyzer. This feature applies to MeasRef Filter and Ref Filter.
Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:RLENgth?

Instructions

Set the filter length
Gets the filter length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0~128

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:FILT:RLENgth 5

6.1.3.4 Alpha/BT
Sets the filter alpha characteristic value of the Sqrt Nyquist raised cosine and root raised cosine
Nyquist filters used by the analyzer, or the BT value of the Gauss filter. This feature applies to Meas
Ref Filter and Ref Filter.

6.1.4

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ABT[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:ABT?

Instructions

Set the filter alphaGets the filter alphaParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0-1

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:FILT:ABT 0.5

Burst/sync Search

6.1.4.1 Search Length
Specifies the time range (length) to search for signals.
The search length must satisfy Search Length >= 1.2 * Meas Interval / Symbol Rate. If modifying theMeas Interval or Symbol Rate causes the length not to meet the conditions, the analyzer willautomatically calculate and match the minimum value.

www.siglent.com

159

SHA850A User Manual

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth?

Instructions

Set the search length
Gets the search length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

1.28ms-4.672ms

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth 0.5ms

6.1.4.2 Burst Search
Burst search measures the burst power (pulses) in a signal and uses this to segment and isolate thesignal for subsequent display and analysis.Using burst search, you can avoid the interference ofinvalid signals to the analysis process.
Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the burst search switch
Query the burst search switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURS ON

6.1.4.3 Burst Search Threshold
Setting the thresholds for the rising and falling edges of the burst, in accordance with the peak powerof the measured signal.
Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold?

Instructions

Set the burst search threshold
Gets the burst search threshold

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-200dBm~200dBm

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold -10

6.1.4.4 Burst Min Length
Setting the min Length for the rising and falling edges of the burst

160

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength?

Instructions

Set the minimum burst length
Gets the burst minimum length

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10us~10ms

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength 0.5ms

6.1.4.5 Burst Min Gap
Setting the min gap for the rising and falling edges of the burst.
Represents the minimum distance (in "symbols") between adjacent bursts. The default value is 1
symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other.
However, in case the "capture buffer" does not contain very close bursts, it is recommended that you
increase the value. This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted
signals.
Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search. It should not be used to
explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement. For example, setting the minimum gap length
to 100 "symbols" does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that have a very small
gap.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap?

Instructions

Set the minimum burst interval
Gets the minimum burst intervalParameter type

Float

Parameter Range

10us~10ms

Return

Float

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap 0.5ms

6.1.4.6 Sync Search
Synchronization search is to search for synchronization codewords in the measured signal, and use
this to segment and isolate the signal for subsequent display and analysis.
The synchronous codeword is a string of symbols (coding), so its length must be an integer multiple ofthe number of bits (number of bits) of each symbol.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe]?

Instructions

Set the synchronization search switch
Query the synchronization search switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnEnumeration

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd ON

www.siglent.com

161

SHA850A User Manual

6.1.4.7 Sync Offset
Specifies the time (in symbols) between the start of the measurement data and the start of the sync
word. If positive, the sync word starts after the start of the measurement data. If negative, the sync
word starts before the start of the measurement data.

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set the synchronous search offset
Gets the synchronous search offset

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range-10000~10000

ReturnInteger

Example:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet 2

6.1.4.8 Sync Pattern
Edit and display sync codewords.

6.1.5

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern?

Instructions

Set the BERT symbol
Get BERT symbol

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

0~320

ReturnStringExample:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern “0011”

BERT

Bit error rate test function, that is, the analyzer uses the measurement result of the current
demodulation analysis and the preset reference signal to compare by bit to obtain the bit error rate.
Reference signals that can be preset in the editing interface and can be saved to a user profile (.stafile) and loaded.

162

Command format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe?

Instructions

Setting the BERT switch
Querying the BERT switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe ON

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.2

Analog Modulation Analysis (AMA)

Used for modulation analysis of analog signals, a series of indicators such as carrier power,
modulation rate, THD can be obtained through analysis.
Analog modulation analysis includes AM, FM, PM modulation.
The modulation mode, IF bandwidth, and equivalent filter can be selected, and the data can beaveraged.

Command format:READ:ADEMod?

Instructions

Obtain the simulation demodulation result
if demod type is AM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
am_depth
sinadcarrier_offset
if demod type is FM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
fm_deviation
sinad
carrier_offset
if demod type is PM it will return:carrier_power
mod_rate
pm radians
sinadcarrier_offset

6.2.1

ReturnStringExample:READ:ADEMod?

Demod Type

Analog modulation analysis includes AM, FM, PM modulation.
Command format[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe?

Instructions

Sets the analog demodulation typeGet analog demodulation type (cannot be queried when not analog
demodulation)

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

AM: analog AM
FM: analog frequency modulation
PM: Analog phase modulation

ReturnEnumeration : AM|FM|PM

Example:ADEMod:STYLe AM

www.siglent.com

163

SHA850A User Manual

6.2.2

IFBW

The IFBW specifies the size of the IF bandwidth of the analyzed signal. If the setting is incorrect, it willaffect the accuracy of the measurement results. The intermediate frequency bandwidth IFBW should
be as small as possible, which can improve the signal-to-noise ratio of demodulation. IFBW can be set
to: 1.2MHz, 960kHz, 600kHz, 480kHz, 300kHz, 240kHz, 120kHz, 96kHz and 60kHz.
For "AM" modulation analysis, the IFBW should be more than twice the modulation frequency; for"FM" modulation analysis, the IFBW should be more than twice the sum of the frequency offset plus
the modulation frequency.

6.2.3

Command format:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx?

Instructions

Set the analog demodulation if bandwidth
Obtain analog demodulation intermediate frequency bandwidthParameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

0-8

Return0-8

Example:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx 5

EqLPF

The EqLPF specifies the equivalent low-pass filter bandwidth of the analyzed signal. If the setting isincorrect, it will affect the accuracy of the measurement results. EqLPF is an additional low-pass filter,
which can be used to measure lower the modulation frequency of the modulation signal. The
bandwidth of EqLPF is fractional times that of IFBW, and there are 6 gears to choose from, namely
IFBW/6, IFBW/20, IFBW/60, IFBW/200, IFBW/600 and IFBW/2000.
The bandwidth of the EqLPF should be as small as possible, which can improve the signal-to-noise
ratio of demodulation, but at the same time, it should be greater than or equal to the modulation
frequency.

6.2.4

Command format:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx?

Instructions

Set up analog demodulation equalization filter
Obtain analog demodulation equalization filter

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

0-6

Return

0-6

Example:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx 2

AverageTurn on or off the averaging option for measurement results, and you can set the number of items
involved in the averaging calculation. When the averaging option is turned off, the "Average" column

164www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manualof the measurement results becomes "Current". The larger the average number, the more stable the"average" value.

6.3
6.3.1

Freq
Freq & Span

In MA mode, only the center frequency can be configured.
Span cannot be set and is only used to show the equivalent channel bandwidth under the current
configuration.

6.3.2

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer?

Instruction

Sets the center frequency.
Gets the center frequency.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

0 Hz ~ 28 GHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer 300 MHz

CF Step

The frequency step is the length of using the direction keys to step when the center frequency is set.
Pay attention to the following points during use:
Changing the value of the center frequency in fixed steps can achieve the purpose of switching themeasurement channels quickly and continuously.

Command Format[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement]?

Instruction

Sets frequency step.
Gets frequency step.

Parameter Type

Float, unit: Hz, kHz, MHz, GHz

Parameter Range

1 Hz ~ 100 MHz

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement] 20 MHz

www.siglent.com

165

SHA850A User Manual

6.4
6.4.1

BW
EQBW

The MA mode does not support configuring the resolution bandwidth, and only displays the equivalent
resolution bandwidth.

6.4.2

Command Format[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]?

Instruction

Querys equalization BW.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnFloat, unit: Hz

Example:BWIDth?

Window

The EQBW filter offers several different window functions that you can switch in real-time based onyour measurement needs. The available window functions include Rectangular window, Hamming
window, Hanning window, Flattop window, Blackman window. The Flattop window is used by default.

166

Command Format[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets window function.
Gets window function.

Parameter Type

Enumeration
RECTangular
HAMMing :HANNing
FLATtop
BLACkmanParameter Range

None

ReturnEnumeration
RECT
HAMM
HANN
FLAT
BLAC

Example:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE BLAC

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.5

Sweep

6.5.1

Measure/Sweep Control (Single/Continue/Restart)

Sweep/Measure:
Single/Continue controls the analyzer to perform a single sweep/measurement or continuous
sweep/measurement.
Restart:Restart the current sweep or measurement. In particular, in the continue mode, modifying someparameters will equivalently perform a restart sweep or measurement.
Command Format:INITiat[:IMMediate]

Instruction

Restart the current sweep.
:INITiate:RESTart and :INITiate:IMMediate perform exactly the same function.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Default

None

Menu
Example:INITiate:IMMediate

Command Format:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF|ON|0|1:INITiate:CONTinuous?

Instruction

Sets continuous sweep mode on-off.
Gets continuous sweep mode state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:INITiate:CONTinuous OFF

Command Format

ABORt

Instruction

This command is used to stop the current measurement. It aborts thecurrentmeasurement as quickly as possible, resets the sweep and trigger
systems, and puts the measurement into an "idle" state.
If the analyzer is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement
and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition(sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met.
If the analyzer is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle" state until
an :INIT:IMM command is received.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Default

None

Menu

None

Example

INIT;ABORt

www.siglent.com

167

SHA850A User Manual

6.6

Trigger

6.6.1

Trigger Source

The analyzer provides a variety of trigger sources to suit different triggering needs.
Free Run
Free trigger is the default use mode of the analyzer, at this time, the spectrum analyzer loops andcontinuously scans.
Video
Using the video trigger mode, a transient signal with a very short time can be captured. In this working
mode, the signal will be triggered and displayed on the screen only when the rising or falling edge of asignal touches the Trigger Level.
External
External triggering provides more abundant triggering functions. If you want to realize periodic
triggering and delayed triggering, you can choose the working mode of external triggering. In thismode, the trigger is controlled by the rising edge or falling edge of the external input signal, and asquare wave signal of a certain frequency can be used for periodic triggering, and the trigger delay
time can be adjusted by setting the trigger delay.
PeriodWhen Periodic is selected, the analyzer uses the built-in period timer signal as a trigger. The trigger
event is set by the period timer parameter, which is modified by the offset and periodic sync Src.
Use this trigger when there is a periodic signal but no reliable signal to trigger. You can synchronize
the periodic signal to an external event (using the periodic sync Src) to get closer to a reliable trigger
signal.
If no synchronization source is selected, then the internal timer will not be synchronized with any
external timed events.

6.6.2

Command format:TRIGger:SOURce:TRIGger:SOURce?

Instructions

sets the trigger source.
gets the trigger source.

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"IMMediate ", "VIDeo ", "EXTernal ","FRAMe"

Return"IMM", "VID", "EXT" ,"FRAMe"

Example:TRIGger:SOURce VID

Trigger Level

Sets the amplitude level of the video trigger (only absolute levels are supported). A trigger occurs
when the slope of the video signal crosses this level.

168

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

When the selected trigger source is video trigger, the trigger level will be displayed as an orange line,
and the right end of the line will be displayed as:
Trig Line: xxxx dBm

6.6.3

Command format:TRIGger: {type}:LEVel:TRIGger: {type}:LEVel?

Instructions

sets the trigger level.
gets the trigger level.
{type}: "VIDeo", "EXTernal"

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-300~50dB

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:VIDeo:LEVel -20

Trigger Slope

Set the external trigger and video trigger trigger polarity. The options are rising edge trigger and fallingedge trigger.

6.6.4

Command format:TRIGger: {type}:SLOPe:TRIGger: {type}:SLOPe?

Instructions

sets the trigger edge.
gets the trigger edge.
{type}: " VIDeo ", " EXTernal "Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"POS", "NEG"

Return"POS", "NEG"

Example:TRIGger: EXTernal:SLOPe:TRIGger: VIDeo:SLOPe?

Trigger Delay

Set trigger delay, negative delay can be set.
The maximum duration of negative delay = 500M/(symbol rate*symbol points*8)
Command format:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:TRIGger:{type}:DELay?
:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:STATe:TRIGger:{type}:DELay:STATe?

Instructions

sets the trigger delay and state.
gets the trigger delay and state.
{type}:" VIDeo ", " EXTernal " ,"FRAMe"

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range-500ms-500ms

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:EXTernal:DELay 5e-3
:TRIGger:FRAMe:DELay?

www.siglent.com

169

SHA850A User Manual

6.6.5

Zero Span Trigger Delay Compensation (External Trigger )Under normal circumstances, after the trigger is generated, the displayed data and the data at thesame time as the trigger are displayed, but because the processing time of the trigger path and thedata path are different, the data displayed at the trigger time is the previous data. This does not affectthe integrity of the data and will not cause data loss at the trigger point. However, in some cases, it isnecessary to display the zero point of the screen coordinates as the input signal information of thetrigger point. At this time, the function of zero-span trigger delay compensation is required.

6.6.6

Period(Period)

Set the trigger period.

6.6.7

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

100ns~10s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:PERiod 1s

Offset Time(Period)

Adjusts the cumulative offset between the periodic trigger clock and the trigger event. The periodic
trigger clock cannot be seen on the software, only the trigger event can be seen. So if you want toadjust the time of the trigger event, you can only adjust the offset between the periodic trigger clock
and the trigger event, but the absolute value of the internal offset is unknown, and each modification tothe offset is based on the previous Do accumulation.

6.6.8

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet?

Instructions

Set/Query Period Trigger period offset

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0s~10sReturn

Float

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet 1s

Reset Offset Display(Period)

The reset period triggers the time offset display. Modifying this parameter does not modify theabsolute value of the internal offset.

170

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

Instructions

Reset Period trigger offset return to zero

Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet

6.6.9

Sync Source(Period)

Set the sync source.

Figure 6–6-1 Sync Source trigger

Command format:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC?

Instructions

Set/Query the type of periodic synchronization

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"OFF", "EXT"

Return"OFF", "EXT"Example:TRIGger:FRAMe:SYNC EXT

6.6.10Auto Trigger

Automatic triggering is an auxiliary triggering method used in non-Free run mode. When the userneeds continuous triggering but the triggering conditions of the selected triggering type are notsatisfied, automatic triggering can be used. After using the automatic trigger, the count starts after ameasurement is completed. If the count does not reach the set value and the trigger condition of theselected trigger is satisfied, the count of the automatic trigger will be cleared and the count will berestarted after the next measurement. If the count reaches the set value and the trigger condition of
the selected trigger is not met, the forced trigger condition is met, and then the measurement isperformed according to the normal trigger process.

www.siglent.com

171

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe?

Instructions

Set or query the automatic trigger switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:ATRigger:STATe 1

Command format:TRIGger:ATRigger:TRIGger:ATRigger?

Instructions

Set or query the automatic trigger time

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

1us~100s

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:ATRigger 1s

6.6.11

Hold OffIn trigger inhibition, hold represents inhibition and off represents release. Trigger hold-off can be used
for other trigger modes other than Free run mode. Intuitively, trigger hold-off can be understood as thestrictening of trigger conditions, that is, the occurrence of a trigger must not only satisfy the trigger
condition of the selected trigger, but also satisfy the additional conditions in trigger hold-off.
NormalIn normal mode, the count is performed before the trigger, and the next trigger can only be generated
after the count meets the set requirements.

Above
For the rising edge of the video trigger (external trigger), it is required that after the trigger, the actuallevel is still higher than the trigger level (trigger threshold) for at least a specified time.
For the falling edge of video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is higher than
the trigger level (trigger threshold) for a single accumulation time exceeding the specified time before
triggering.
For the periodic trigger, the trigger moment is high level, the duration is a time period, and the othertime is low level, which can be inferred according to other triggers.

Below
For the rising edge of video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is lower than thetrigger level (trigger threshold) for a single accumulation time exceeding the specified time before
triggering.
For the falling edge of the video trigger (external trigger), it is required that the actual level is still lower
than the trigger level (trigger threshold) after triggering for at least a specified time.

172

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

The periodic trigger can be pushed in the same way.

6.7
6.7.1

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff:STATe 1

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TRIGger:HOLDoff?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff time

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

0~500ms

Return

Float

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff 0.01s

Command format:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE?

Instructions

Set or query the trigger holdoff type

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range"NORMal","ABOVe","BELOw"

Return"NORMal","ABOVe","BELOw"

Example:TRIGger:HOLDoff:TYPE ABOVe

Ampt
Attenuator & RF Preamp

According to the amplitude of the input signal, the user can set the corresponding RF front-end
attenuator and amplifier, the purpose of which is to avoid display distortion when inputting large
signals and reduce noise when inputting small signals.

Command Format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?

Instruction

Sets the input attenuator.
Gets the input attenuator.

Parameter Type

Integer, unit: dB

Parameter Range

0 dB ~ 51 dB

ReturnInteger, unit: dB

Example[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation 30 dB

www.siglent.com

173

SHA850A User Manual

6.7.2

Command Format[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Instruction

Sets the input attenuator.
Gets the input attenuator.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO ON

Ref Level & Scale

Displays and configures the reference and scale of the currently selected window. The unit is basedon the unit of the trace data.
Auto Scale and Auto Scale All can be used to adjust the scale of the current and all windows
adaptively to the waveform data.
Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel?

Instruction

This command sets the reference level for the Y-axis.
Gets reference level.
The command is valid if the measurement mode is ASK, FSK, MSK, PSK,QAM and the data format is not Syms/Errs.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

If the display type is Log Mag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Lin Mag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Real: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Imag: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is I-Q: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Constellation: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is I-Eye: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Q-Eye: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Wrap Phase: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Unwrap Phase: -1000 ~ 1000
If the display type is Trellis-Eye: -1e5 ~ 1e9

ReturnFloat

Default
Example:TRACe4:Y:RLEVel 2

Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision?

Instruction

This command sets the per-division display scaling for the y-axis.
Gets Scale/Div when scale type.
The command is valid if the measurement mode is ASK, FSK, MSK, PSK,QAM and the data format is not Syms/Errs.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

174

Return

Float

Example:TRACe4:Y:PDIVision 2

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:TRACe1|2|3|4[:Y]:AUToscale

Instruction

Sets auto scale.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

ReturnNone

Example:TRACe2:AUToscale

6.8

Trace

6.8.1

Select Trace

Select the current trace you want to select. After a trace is selected, parameters such as the reference
level of the trace can be adjusted. You can also touch the screen and click the window where the trace
is located to select the trace.
After the trace is selected, the mark ">" is displayed to the left of the trace mark.
Command Format:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt?

Instruction

Sets trace number.
Gets trace number.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

1~4

ReturnInteger

Example:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt 4

6.8.2

LayoutSelect the layout of the screen windows. The layout types are as follows:⚫

Single⚫

Stacked 2⚫

Grid 1,2⚫

Grid 2x2

Command Format:DISPlay:LAYout

Instruction

Sets trace layout on screen.
Currently, one row, two columns are not supported (1, 2)

Parameter Type

Integer (rows, columns)

Parameter Rangerows 1 ~ 2columns 1 ~ 2ReturnExamplewww.siglent.com:DISPlay:LAYout

2,2

175

SHA850A User Manual

6.8.3

Trace Display and Layout（DMA）

Window layout:
You can choose to display 1 to 4 windows, and each window can specify the trace data type.

Symbol table:
Displays the demodulated digital symbol code, which can be expressed in binary or hexadecimal.

6.8.4

Trace Display and Layout（AMA）

Display up to 3 windows, each window displays different traces, respectively:
Time domain waveform;
Frequency domain waveform;
Demodulation result parameters.

6.8.5

Select Trace

Select the trace in order to set the corresponding trace parameters. You can also select the trace byclicking on the trace mark displayed in the left status bar of the screen.

6.8.6

Num of Traces

Set the upper limit of displayed trace numbers. Up to four traces can be displayed simultaneously inthe screen window.

6.8.7

Data

Select the displayed data of the trace.

176

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME?

Instruction

Sets trace format.
Gets trace format.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

TIME: time
SPECtrum: spectrum
MTIMe: IQ meas time
MSPEctrum: IQ meas spectrum (FFT of IQ Meas Time.)
RTIMe: IQ Reference time (Reconstructed ideal time waveform to compare IQ
Meas Time against)

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

RSPEctrum: IQ Reference spectrum (FFT of IQ Reference time.)
MERRor: IQ Mag Err (Difference in length of the IQ Meas Time vector and IQ
Ref Time vectorat each point in time.)
PERRor: IQ Phase Err (Difference in phase of the IQ Meas Time vector and IQ
Ref Time vector at each point in time.)
EVTime: Error Time (Vector difference between IQ Meas Time and IQ Ref
Time at each pointin time.)
EVSPectrum: Error Vector Spec
SYMSerrs: Syms/Errs
RAWtime: Raw data

6.8.8

ReturnEnumeration

Example:TRACe:DATA:NAME SYMS

FormatSelect the displayed format of the trace.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]?

Instruction

Sets trace format
Gets trace format

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

MLOG: Log Mag
MLINear: Lin Mag
REAL: RealIMAGinary: Imag
IQ: I-Q
CONStln: Constellation
IEYE: I-Eye
QEYE: Q-Eye
WPHAse: Wrap Phase
UWPHase: Unwrap Phase
TRELlis: Trellis-Eye

Return

MLOG
MLIN
REAL
IMAG
IQ
CONS
IEYE
QEYE
WPHA
UWPH
TREL

Example:TRACe:FORMat MLIN

6.8.9

Eye Length

Set the length of the Eye diagram.
Command Format

www.siglent.com:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth?

177

SHA850A User Manual

Instruction

Sets eye length.
Gets eye length.

Parameter Type

IntegerParameter Range

2 ~ 40ReturnInteger

Example:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth 4

6.8.10

Symbol Table

Display the demodulation digital symbols (binary or hex).

6.9

Command Format:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat?

Instruction

Displays format of Symbol Table data.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

BINary|HEXadecimal

ReturnEnumeration BIN|HEX

Example:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat HEX

Marker

6.9.1

Select Marker & Select Trace

To operate a marker, it must first be selected as the marker for the current operation. When there are
multiple active marker, the marker currently operating in the waveform area will be displayed at thefront, while other marker will be hollowed out (filled in black). At this time, the upper right corner of the
waveform area will also display the reading of the current marker. To query the readings of all active
marker, open the marker table ([Marker Settings]:[ Marker Table]).
A marker can only be associated with one trace. When adding a marker, if it is not manually selected,
the marker will be associated with the currently activated trace by default (refer to the trace setting).

6.9.2

Marker Type

Marker supports 2 types : normal,delta,off. Depending on the type of marker, the reading and positionof the marker are also different when the trace is refreshed:⚫

normal: The marker is attached to a trace point, the vertical position of the marker is refreshedsynchronously with the trace refresh, and the reading is the reading of the trace point.

⚫

delta : delta marker use a pair of marker to identify the frequency (time) and amplitude difference
between two trace points.
After selecting "delta", a pair of marker will appear on the trace: a fixed reference marker (marked
by a marker number and "+", such as "1+") and a difference marker (marked by a relative marker

178

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual
number and a symbol "∆") ” identifier, such as “1∆2”). At this time, the reading in the upper rightcorner of the waveform area also displays the frequency (or time) difference and amplitudedifference between the difference marker and the reference marker, respectively.
After the marker selects "delta", the original marker will become the difference measurement
marker. If it is not specified, the marker with the current marker number increasing by default will
become the reference "fixed" marker.
The delta marker is in the "relative" state, similar to the "normal" marker, and its X-axis position
can be changed; the reference marker is in the "fixed" state by default (the X-axis and Y-axis
positions are fixed), but can be changed to "normal" by changing state and the X axis can be
adjusted.
⚫

off : close marker.

Notice:When opening a marker or modifying parameters, if the marker has never been opened or the marker
position exceeds the current span range, the horizontal position of the marker will be the center
frequency, that is, the center of the waveform area.
A marker's relative marker has one and only one and cannot be itself. A marker can be the relative
marker of multiple marker at the same time.
When closing a marker, the marker type of other relative markre that it is a relative marker willautomatically change to normal.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle OFF|ON|0|1:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle?

Instruction

Sets marker state.
Gets marker state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:TRACe1:MARKer1:ENABle ON

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE POSition|DELTa|OFF:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE?

Instruction

Sets marker mode.
Gets marker mode.

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

POSition
DELTa
OFF

ReturnEnumeration: POS|DELT|OFF

Example:TRACe:MARKer:TYPE POSitionwww.siglent.com

179

SHA850A User Manual

6.9.3

Marker X

Set the horizontal position parameter of the current marker.
When the [marker Type] of the current marker is [Off], the marker frequency/marker time cannot be
set.
Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X?

Instruction

Sets marker X value.
Gets marker X value.
This command only works when marker is not off.

Parameter Type

Float

Parameter Range

6.9.4

Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:X 200:TRACe:MARKer:X?

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?

Instruction

Gets marker Y value.

Parameter Type

None

Parameter Range

None

Return

Float

Example:TRACe:MARKer:Y?

Reset Delta

Pressing this control is exactly the same as pressing the “Delta” selection on the Marker Mode radio
button. The selected marker becomes a Delta Marker . If the selected marker is already a Delta
marker, the reference marker is moved to the current position of the selected marker, thus resetting
the Delta to zero.

6.9.5

Relative To“Relative to” is used to measure the delta values of X (Frequency or Time) and Y (Amplitude) between
two markers which can mark on different traces.
After the marker selects “Delta”, the original marker will become the delta measurement marker, andthe related marker of the incrementing sequence number will become the reference “fixed” marker

180

Command Format:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence?

Instruction

Sets reference marker.
Gets reference marker.
Cannot set the current marker to the reference marker.

Parameter Type

Integerwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

6.9.6

Parameter Range

1~4

Return

1~4

Example:TRACe:MARKer:REFerence 3

Marker Couple

When this function is On, moving any marker causes an equal X Axis movement of every othermarker which is Off.
Command Format:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle OFF|ON|0|1:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle?

Instruction

Sets marker couple state.
Gets marker couple state.

Parameter Type

BooleanParameter Range

OFF|ON|0|1

Return0|1

Example:CALCulate:MARKer:COUPle ON

www.siglent.com

181

SHA850A User Manual

7

Input and Output

7.1

Freq Ref Input

Frequency Reference Source include inside reference source, external reference source, GPSreference source and auto-selection reference source. Defualt auto-selection reference source. The
order of priority is external reference source, GPS reference source, internal reference source. Whenthe external reference source is not connected, the External Reference button is unavailable.When
GNSS is turned off, the GPS reference source button is unavailable.

Command Format[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?

Illustration

Set Reference Source

Parameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

INTE|EXT|GPS|SENS

example:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE INTE:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE?

7.2

Input Z Correction

Input Impedance include 50 Ohm and 75 Ohm, default 50 Ohm. A adaptor of 75 Ohm to 50 Ohm isrequired, when the input impedance select 75 Ohm.
The selection of input impedance will influence calculation result only. That influence include voltage
and electric current (dBmV, dBuV, dBuA, V, A), but power.

182

Command Format[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude][:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]?

Illustration

Set Input ImpedanceParameter Type

Enumeration

Parameter range

OHM50|OHM75

example:CORRection:IMPedance OHM50:CORRection:IMPedance OHM75

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

7.3

GNSS

The handheld spectrum analyzer integrates a GNSS global positioning navigation system module andsupports positioning display, GPS timing, and 1PPS clock synchronization. GNSS feature menu
navigation: System menu -> Input and output menu -> GNSS.
When GNSS is turned on, GPS is enabled to start searching for stars. If the satellite search andlocking is successful, the "satellite locked icon" will be displayed in the system status bar (see area 1
in the figure below). If the satellite search and locking fails, the "satellite not locked icon" will be
displayed in the system status bar. If the display switch is turned on, "GNSS information" will be
displayed below the system status bar (see area 2 in the figure below). GNSS information display
content includes: number of satellites, longitude, latitude, and altitude.
When GNSS is turned on, the GPS item enable for the frequency reference input is selectable. WhenGPS is used as the frequency reference, GPS taming will be performed in the background. If
successful, it will prompt that GPS taming is successful, otherwise it will prompt that GPS taming
failed. The prerequisite for taming execution is successful star search and locking (Satellites is not 0).
For the frequency reference switching logic, please refer to "Frequency Reference Source" in the"Input and Output" chapter.

Figure 7-1 GNSS turns on display

7.3.1

GNSS Receiver

The SCPI commands for the GNSS receiver switch and the SCPI commands for positioning
information content are as follows:

www.siglent.com

183

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:SYSTem:GPS?

Instructions

Set GNSS switch
Acquisition GNSS switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:SYSTem:GPS 1

Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:INFO?

Instructions

Get GPS information

ReturnStringExample:SYSTem:GPS:INFO?

7.3.2

Sync Clock

Sync Clock refers to GNSS timing. The function of the synchronous clock switch is to enable ordisable the system clock to be synchronized to GPS UTC time. When Sync Clock is turned on, thesystem time is synchronized to the GPS UTC clock every approximately half an hour. When thesynchronized clock is turned off, the synchronized GPS clock is turned off. It should be noted thatwhen the timing switch is switched from ON to OFF, the date and time will not be restored to thesettings before clock synchronization.
Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:SYNC:CLOCk:SYSTem:GPS:SYNC:CLOCk?

Instructions

Set sync clock switch
Acquisition sync clock switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:SYSTem:GPS:SYNC:CLOCk 1

7.3.3

Display

The display switch under the GNSS menu is the switch displayed in the GNSS information bar. It isonly affected by this switch and the GNSS function switch. The GNSS information bar is displayed
only when Display is ON and the GNSS Receiver is not OFF.
Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:DISPlay:SYSTem:GPS:DISPlay?

Instructions

Set the switch displayed in the GNSS information bar
Get the switch status displayed in the GNSS information bar

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:SYSTem:GPS:DISPlay 1

184

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Lat/Lon Format

7.3.4

The latitude and longitude display format can be set under the GNSS menu. The supported format
types are: ddd°mm.mmmmm', ddd°mm' ss.sss'', ddd.ddddddd°.
Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:POSition:FORMat:SYSTem:GPS:POSition:FORMat?

Instructions

Set or get the latitude and longitude display format

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

DEGM | DEGMS | DEG

Example:SYSTem:GPS:POSition:FORMat DEGM
:SYSTem:GPS:POSition:FORMat?

Elevation Unit

7.3.5

Altitude units can be set under the GNSS menu. Supported types: Inches, Meters.
Command Format:SYSTem:GPS:ELEVation:UNIT:SYSTem:GPS:ELEVation:UNIT?

Instructions

Set or get altitude units

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

INCH | METERS

Example:SYSTem:GPS:ELEVation:UNIT INCH
:SYSTem:GPS:ELEVation:UNIT?

7.4
7.4.1

BIAS
Bias switch

After the Bias switch is turned on, the Bias out port of the spectrometer outputs a voltage.

7.4.2

Command Format:SYSTem:BIAS:SYSTem:BIAS?

Instructions

Set Bias switch
Acquisition Bias switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

ReturnBoolean

Example:SYSTem: Bias1

Bias voltage

Bias voltage setting
Command Format:SYSTem:BIAS:VALUe:SYSTem:BIAS:VALUe?

Instructions

Bias voltage setting

www.siglent.com

185

SHA850A User Manual

Gain Bias voltage

186

Parameter type

Float

Parameter Range

12V~32V

Return

Float

Example:SYSTem:BIAS:VALUe 20

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

8

System Settings

8.1

System

8.1.1

About

Figure 8–1 about

Area 1 Displays product information, including product name, serial number, Host ID, and IP address.
Area 2 Displays firmware information including software version, FPGA version, CPLD version, andhardware version.
Area 3 displays information about installed options.

Command format:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?

Instructions

Query device system information

ReturnStringExample:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?

www.siglent.com

187

SHA850A User Manual

8.1.2

HardwareFigure 8–2 Hardware

Area 1 displays the current operating status of the analyzer, including the RF board temperature, CPUtemperature, and fan speed.
Area 2 displays automatic alignment (temperature drift compensation) information, including
calibration status, time of last calibration, temperature, and temperature difference.
Area 3 shows information about installed options.

8.1.3

Log Record

Display system alarms and warnings.

8.1.4

Language

The analyzer supports a multi-language menu, Chinese and English built-in help and popup
messages.
Press this key to select the desired display language.

188

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

8.1.5

Command format:SYSTem:LANGuage CHINESE|ENGLISH:SYSTem:LANGuage?

Instructions

Setting languages
Acquire languages

Parameter type

Enumeration

Parameter Range

CHINESEENGLISH

ReturnEnumeration: CHINESE|ENGLISH

Example:SYSTem:LANGuage CHINESE:SYSTem:LANGuage?

Connect Setting

8.1.5.1 Network Configuration
Display the MAC address.
Dynamically obtain network IP information (DHCP) or manually set IP address, subnet mask, andgateway parameters.

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE?

Instructions

Set/Obtain the DHCP switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0|1

Return0|1

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE 1:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?

Instructions

Setting an IP Address
Obtaining an IP Address

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address Settings must comply with specifications(0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

ReturnIP address string

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress “192.168.1.12”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway?

Instructions

Set the gateway
Access gateway

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address must comply with the nic specifications(0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

ReturnGateway string

www.siglent.com

189

SHA850A User Manual

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway “192.168.1.1”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway?

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk {“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk?

Instructions

Set the subnet mask according to your computer network Settings
Obtain the subnet mask

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

The IP address must comply with the nic specifications(0-255:0-255:0-255:0-255)

ReturnstringExample:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk “255.255.255.0”:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk?

8.1.5.2 Web services
Analyzer supports web VNC remote access.The analyzer will display the content of the remote
projection to the web page, at the same time support mouse and keyboard remote input parameters.
VNC reset can be set to View only mode. In this case, the input on the web page is invalid.
⚫

When you log in to the VNC, enter the same password as the preset one.

⚫

To change the port or viewing mode, you need to restart VNC.

Command format:SYSTem:WEB:PSW:SYSTem:WEB:PSW?

Instructions

Set web password
Get web password

Parameter type

StringReturnStringxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:WEB:PSW “123456”

8.1.5.3 GPIB
Set the GPIB port number.USB Host port on the front panel provides USB-GPIB connection. Use an
original board card.

190

Command format:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess {password}:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess?

Instructions

Set the GPIB
Get the GPIB

Parameter type

Integer

ReturnGPIB address (integer)

Example:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess 25

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

8.1.6

Date and Time

Switch the time and date display status in the upper right corner of the screen.
Modify the system time display format, including YMD, MDY, and Dmy.

8.1.7

Command format:SYSTem:TIME:SYSTem:TIME?

Instructions

Setting the System Time
Obtaining system time

Parameter type

StringParameter Range

Hours (0~23), minutes (0~59), seconds (0~59)

ReturnStringxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:TIME 182559:SYSTem:TIME?

Command format:SYSTem:DATE:SYSTem:DATE?

Instructions

Set the system date
Get system dateParameter type

StringParameter Range

Year (four lengths), month (1~12), day (1~31)

ReturnString:xxxxxxxx

Example:SYSTem:DATE 20220101:SYSTem:DATE?

OptionLoad the option by loading the purchased.lic option file

8.1.8

Command format:SYSTem:LKEY {”option”},{”license key”}

Instructions

Loading the specified option with the registration code, Restart to take effectParameter type

Enumeration , String

Parameter Range”option” : RTSA|DMA|AMA|AMK|RT40”license key” : DING YANG technology to provide authorization code, 16 - bitstringExample:SYSTem:LKEY “RESA”,”fjbdajffnklmgwno”

UpgradeSelect from memory.The ADS file upgrades the firmware. After the firmware is upgraded, the machine
will restart

www.siglent.com

191

SHA850A User Manual

8.2

Reset

8.2.1

PresetPerform a reset operation based on the reset type currently set.
Command format:SYSTem:PRESet

Note

Reset the device parameters based on the reset type

Example:SYSTem:PRESet

8.2.2

Preset Type

Perform the reset operation based on the current reset type. Select a configuration type for the
spectrum analyzer to reset and load.Reset Settings Preset types include default, last time, and User.
⚫

Default: Reset the default loading parameters⚫

Last time: reset to the state before the user's last software shutdown.

⚫

User: Resets and loads the configuration file specified by the user. This file can be obtained bysaving the user Settings.

8.2.3

Command format:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE DFT|LAST|USER:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE?

Note

Set the reset configuration type
Gets the reset configuration type

Parameter

type enumeration

Parameter Range

DFT : default
LAST : last
USER :user

The return value

enumeration : DFT|LAST|USER

The default value

DFT

Example:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE DFT

Save User Config

Saves the current system state as user-defined Settings to internal non-volatile storage.

8.2.4

Command format:SYSTem:PRESet:USER#:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER#:LOAD

LOAD

Save the user configuratio
Loading user Configuration

Example:SYSTem:PRESet:USER2:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER2:LOAD

Power On

Select the configuration to be loaded during power-on.Default configuration, last configuration, andUser configuration are available
192

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command format:SYSTem:PON:TYPE DFT|LAST|USER:SYSTem:PON:TYPE?

Note

Set the startup load configuration type
Get the startup load configuration type

Parameter typeenumeration

Parameter Range

DFT : Default
LAST : last
USER : user

The return value

enumeration : DFT|LAST|USER

Default Values

DFT

ExampleSYSTem:PON:TYPE DFT

8.2.5

Factory Reset

When Factory Reset is selected, the device will recall the initial config.
Command format:SYSTem:FDEFault

Note

Restore the factory default Settings

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Default Values

None

Example:SYSTem:FDEFault

Reset&Clear

8.2.6

Clear the current Settings and restore the default Settings.

8.3

Command format:SYSTem:CLEAr

Note

Clear system Settings/files

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Default Values

None

Example:SYSTem:FDEFault

Alignments

The alignment function is used to calibrate errors caused by temperature drift.
Automatic alignment:
After automatic alignment is turned on, the analyzer determines and triggers temperature error
calibration logic based on temperature changes.
Calibrate now:
Perform a temperature error calibration immediately.

www.siglent.com

193

SHA850A User Manual

8.4

Command format:CALibration:STATe 0|1:CALibration:STATe?

Note

Sets/gets the automatic calibration switch

Parameter type

Boole

Parameter Range

0|1

The return value

0|1

Default Values

0

Example:CALibration:STATe 0

Command format:CALibration

Note

Perform a calibration immediately

Parameter type

None

Parameter Range

None

The return value

None

Example:CALibration

File

Activate the analyzer file operation dialog box to perform file-related operations.Include: File Browser,
File Browser, and Recall File.

194

Command format:MMEMory:STORe STA|TRC|COR|CSV|LIM|JPG|BMP|PNG, ”{file}”

Note

Different modes support different types of file formats

Parameter typecharacterstring

Example:MMEMory:STORe STA, ”ABC.sta”

Command format:MMEMory:LOAD STA|TRC|COR|LIM, ”{file}”

Note

Read the fileParameter typecharacterstring

Example:MMEMory:LOAD STA, “ABC.sta”( “File name needs to be added”)

Command format:MMEMory:DELete ”{file}”

Note

Delete files or folders

Parameter typecharacter string

Example:MMEMory:DELete ”ABC.sta”

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

8.5

Display

Set screen brightness.
Set grid brightness in waveform area.
Set buzzer state
Set buzzer volume

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness?

Instructions

Set the grid brightness of the waveform area
Get waveform area grid brightness

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness?

Instructions

Set screen Brightness
Get screen brightness

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme?

Instructions

Set the volume of the buzzer
Gets the buzzer volume

Parameter type

IntegerParameter Range

0~100

ReturnInteger

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme 50

Command format:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe?

Instructions

Set the buzzer switch
Obtain the buzzer switch

Parameter type

BooleanParameter Range

0/1

Return0/1

Example:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe 1

www.siglent.com

195

SHA850A User Manual

8.6

Power

This menu provides shutdown and restart operation buttons.
Analysis Provides energy saving options. You can set the analyzer to automatically turn off the display
if no operation is performed within a specified period of time.
When the power-on and power-on function is turned on, the analyzer is powered on and can be turned
off.

8.7
8.7.1

Command format:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Instructions

Close the device

Example:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Command format:SYSTem:POWer:OFF

Instructions

Restart the device (some machines may not support restart and need to be
manually started after shutdown)

Example:SYSTem:RESTart

Self Test
Screen Test

Test whether the screen has any pixel defects by displaying five colors: White, Red, Green, Blue andBlack. Press ‘Preset’ key to switch the screen color and press ‘←’ key to exit the test.

8.7.2

Keyboard Test

Enter the keyboard test interface. Press the function keys at the front panel one-by-one and observe
whether the corresponding key is checked. If not, an error may have occurred in that key. To exit the
test, press ‘←’ four times.

8.7.3

LCD Test

If the keys at the front panel are transparent, when the key is pressed, the corresponding backlight willturn on when testing it.

8.7.4

Touch Test

Test whether the touch screen has any defects by touching the test button at specific spots on screen.

196

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

9

Remote Control

The analyzer features LAN, USB Device, and GPIB_USB module interfaces. By using a computerwith these interfaces, and a suitable programming language (and/or NI-VISA software), users canremotely control the analyzer based on SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)
command set, LabView and IVI (Interchangeable Virtual Instrument), to interoperate with otherprogrammable instruments.
This chapter introduces how to build communication between the analyzer and a controller computerwith these interfaces.

9.1

Remotely Operating the Analyzer

The analyzer provides both the USB and LAN connection which allows you to set up a remote
operation environment with a controller computer. A controller computer could be a personal
computer (PC) or a minicomputer. Some intelligent instruments also function as controllers.

9.1.1

USB Device port

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via USB-Device:1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for USB-TMC driver.

2

Connect the analyzer USB Device port to a PC with a USB A-B cable.

3

Switch on the analyzer.

The analyzer will be detected automatically as a new USB hardware.

9.1.2

LAN port

Figure 9–1 LAN config

www.siglent.com

197

SHA850A User Manual

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via LAN:
1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for VXI driver. Or without NI-VISA, using socket or telnet in your PC’s
Operating System.

2

Connect the analyzer to PC or the local area network with a LAN cable.

3

Switch on the analyzer.

4

Press button on the front panel
function menu.

5

Select the IP Config between Static and DHCP.

System→ Interface → LAN to enter the LAN Config⚫

DHCP: the DHCP server in the current network will assign the network parameters
automatically (IP address, subnet mask, gate way) for the analyzer.

⚫

Static: you can set the IP address, subnet mask, gate way manually. Press Apply.

The analyzer will be detected automatically or manually as a new LAN point.

9.1.3

GPIB-USB Host port

Refer to the following steps to finish the connection via USB:
1

Install NI-VISA on your PC for GPIB driver.

2

Connect the analyzer USB Host port to a PC’s GPIB card port, with SIGLENT USB-GPIB
adaptor.

3

Switch on the analyzer

Figure 9–2 SIGLENT USB-GPIB Adaptor

4

Press button on the front panel
number.

System→Interface→

GPIB

to enter the GPIB

The analyzer will be detected automatically as a new GPIB point.

198

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

9.2

Build Communication

9.2.1

VISA

NI-VISA includes a Run-Time Engine version and a Full version. The Run-Time Engine version
provides NI device drivers such as USB-TMC, VXI, GPIB, etc. The full version includes the Run-TimeEngine and a software tool named NI MAX that provides a user interface to control the device.
You can get NI-VISA full version from:http://www.ni.com/download/.
After download you can follow the steps below to install it:
1

Double click the visa_full.exe, dialog shown as below:

Figure 9–3

2

Click Unzip, the installation process will automatically launch after unzipping files. If yourcomputer needs to install .NET Framework 4, its setup process will auto start.

Figure 9–4

3

The NI-VISA installing dialog is shown above. Click Next to start the installation process.

www.siglent.com

199

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 9–5

4

Set the install path, default path is “C:\Program Files\National Instruments\”, you can change it.
Click Next, dialog shown as above.

Figure 9–6

5

Click Next twice, in the License Agreement dialog, select the “I accept the above 2 License
Agreement(s).”, and click Next, dialog shown as below:

Figure 9–7

6

200

Click Next to run installation.

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 9–8

Now the installation is complete, reboot your PC.

9.2.2

Sockets/Telnet

Through the LAN interface, VXI-11, Sockets and Telnet protocols can be used to communicate withthe analyzer. VXI-11 is provided in NI-VISA, while Sockets and Telnet are commonly included in PC’s
OS initially.
Socket LAN is a method used to communicate with the analyzer over the LAN interface using theTransmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). A socket is a fundamental technology used
for computer networking and allows applications to communicate using standard mechanisms built
into network hardware and operating systems. The method accesses a port on the analyzer fromwhich bidirectional communication with a network computer can be established.
Before you can use sockets LAN, you must select the analyzer’s sockets port number to use:⚫

Standard mode: Available on port 5025. Use this port for programming.

⚫

Telnet mode: The telnet SCPI service is available on port 5024.

9.3

Remote Control Capabilities

9.3.1

User-defined Programming

Users can use SCPI commands to program and control the analyzer. For details, refer to theintroductions in “Programming Examples”.

www.siglent.com

201

SHA850A User Manual

9.3.2

NI MAX

Users can control the analyzer remotely by sending SCPI commands via NI-MAX software. NI_MAX is
National Instruments Measurement and Automation Explorer. It is an executable program thatenables easy communication to troubleshoot issues with instrumentation.
9.3.2.1 Using USB
Run NI MAX software.
1

Click “Device and interface” at the upper left corner of the software;2

Find the “USBTMC” device symbol

Figure 9–9
3

Click “Open VISA Test Panel” option button, then the following interface will appear.

4

Click the “Input/Output” option button and click the “Query” option button in order to view theoperation information.

Figure 9–10

Note: The “*IDN?” command (known as the Identification Query) returns the instrument manufacturer,
instrument model, serial number, and other identification information.

9.3.2.2 Using LAN
Select “Add Network Device”, and select “VISA TCP/IP Resource” as shown:
Run NI MAX software.

202

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

1

Click “Device and interface” at the upper left corner of the software;2

Find the “Network Devices” symbol, click “Add Network Devices”;

Figure 9–11

3

Select Manual Entry of LAN instrument, select Next, and enter the IP address as shown. Click
Finish to establish the connection:

Figure 9–12

Note: Leave the LAN Device Name BLANK or the connection will fail.

www.siglent.com

203

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 9–13

4

After a brief scan, the connection should be shown under Network Devices:

Figure 9–14

5

Right-click on the product and select Open NI-VISA Test Panel:

Figure 9–15

6

204

Click “Input/Output” option button and click “Query” option button. If everything is OK, you will see
the Read operation information returned as shown below.

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Figure 9–16

9.3.3

Web browser

The analyzer can be remotely controlled through PC or web browser of mobile terminal installing any
driver.It mimics the touch screen/mouse clickable display function, just like a physical instrument.The
browser also supports screenshot and firmware update functions.

Figure 9–17

*It is recommended to use a web browser that supports HTML5, such as Chrome or Firefox.

www.siglent.com

205

SHA850A User Manual

10 SCPI Overview
10.1 Command Format
SCPI commands present a hierarchical tree structure containing multiple subsystems, each of thesubsystems is made up of a root keyword and several subkeywords. The command string usually
starts with “:”, the keywords are separated by “:” and the followed parameter settings are separated by
space. Query commands add “?” at the end of the string.
For example::SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer <freq>:SENSe:FREQuency:CENTer?
SENSe is the root key of the command, FREQuency and CENTer are second and third keywords. The
command begins with “:”, and separates the keywords at the same time, <freq> separated by spaceand represents the parameter available for setting; “?” represents a query.

10.2 Symbol Instruction
The following four symbols are not the content of SCPI commands and cannot be sent with thecommands, but are usually used in the commands.
1

Triangle Brackets < >The parameter in the triangle brackets must be replaced by an effective value. For example:
Send the “:DEMod:VOLume <value>” command in “:DEMod:VOLume 5”.

2

Square Brackets [ ]The content in the square brackets can be ignored. When the parameter is ignored, theinstrument will set the parameter to its default. For example,
In the “[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation?” command, sending any of the four commands
below can generate the same effect::POWer:ATTenuation?
:POWer:RF:ATTenuation?
:SENSe:POWer:ATTenuation?
:SENSe:POWer:RF:ATTenuation?

3

Vertical Bar |The vertical bar is used to separate multiple parameters and when sending the command, you
can choose one of the parameters. For example,
In the “[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1” command, the parameters

206

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual
available are “OFF”, “ON”, “0” or “1”.

4Braces { }The parameters in the braces are optional which can be ignored or set for one or more times. For
example::CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA <x-axis>,<ampl>{,<x-axis>, <ampl>}, in the command, the{,<x-axis>, <ampl>} parameters can be ignored or set for one or more times.

10.3 Parameter TypeThe parameters in the commands introduced in this manual include 6 types: boolean, enumeration,
integer, float, discrete and string.

1

Boolean
The parameters in the commands could be “OFF”, “ON”, “0” or “1”. For example:[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO OFF|ON|0|1

2

Enumeration
The parameter could be any of the values listed. For example:[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE LOGPower|POWer|VOLTage
The parameter is “OGPower”, “POWer” or “VOLTage”.

3

String
The parameter should be the combinations of ASCII characters. For example::SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress <“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”>
The parameter can be set as “192.168.1.12” string.

4

Integer
Except other notes, the parameter can be any integer within the effective value range. For
example:[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume <value>
The parameter < value > can be set to any integer between 0 and 10.

5

Float

www.siglent.com

207

SHA850A User Manual

The parameter could be any value within the effective value range according to the accuracy
requirement (the default accuracy contains up to 9 digits after the decimal points). For example::CALCulate:BANDwidth:NDB <value>
The parameter < value > can be set to any real number between -100 and 100.

6Discrete
The parameter could only be one of the specified values and these values are discontinuous. For
example:[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio <number>
The parameter <number> could only be one of 0.001, 0.003, 0.01, 0.03, 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0,
30.0, 100.0, 300.0, 1000.0.

10.4 Command Abbreviation
All of the commands are not case sensitive, so you can use any of them. But if abbreviation is used, all
the capital letters in the command must be written completely. For example::DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?

Can be abbreviated to::DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:DLIN:STAT?

10.5 IEEE Common Commands
*IDN
*RST
*CLS
*ESE
*ESR?
*OPC
*SRE
*STB?
*WAI
*TRG
*TST?

208

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Command Format*IDN?

Instruction

Returns an instrument identification information string. The string will containthe manufacturer, model number, serial number, software number, FPGA
number and CPLD number.

Menu

None

Example*IDN?
Return: Siglent,SVA1015,1234567890,100.01.01.06.01

Command Format*RST

Instruction

This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is
appropriate for remote programming operation.

Menu

None

Example*RST

Command Format*CLS

Instruction

Clears the status byte register. It does this by emptying the error queue andclearing all bits in all of the event registers. The status byte registersummarizes the states of the other registers. It is also responsible forgenerating service requests.

Menu

None

Example*CLS

Command Format*ESE <number>*ESE?

Instruction

Set the bits in the standard event status enable register. This register monitors
I/O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete, request
control, query error, device dependent error, execution error, command error
and power on. A summary bit is generated on execution of the command.
The query returns the state of the standard event status enable register.

Menu

None

Example*ESE 16

Command Format*ESR?

Instruction

Queries and clears the standard event status event register. (This is a
destructive read.) The value returned reflects the current state (0/1) of all thebits in the register.

Menu

None

Example*ESR?

Command Format

*OPC
*OPC?

Instruction

Set bit 0 in the standard event status register to “1” when all pending operations
have finished.
The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current
processing is complete. Then it returns a “1”, and the program continues. This
query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external
bus.
Returns a “1” if the last processing is complete. Use this query when there’s aneed to monitor the command execution status, such as a sweep execution.

www.siglent.com

209

SHA850A User Manual

210

Menu

None

Example*OPC?

Command Format*SRE <integer>*SRE?

Instruction

This command enables the desired bits of the service request enable register.
The query returns the value of the register, indicating which bits are currently
enabled. The default value is 255.

Menu

None

Example*SRE 1

Command Format*STB?

Instruction

This query is used by some instruments for a self test.

Menu

None

Example*STB?

Command Format*WAI

Instruction

This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands arecompleted before executing any additional commands.
There is no query form to the command.

Menu

None

Example*WAI

Command Format*TRG

Instruction

Restarts the current sweep.

Menu

None

Example*TRG

Command Format*TST?

Instruction

This query is used by some instruments for a self test.

Menu

None

Example*TST?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

10.6 SCPI LIST
10.6.1GPSA

Mode/Meas:INSTrument[:SELect]:INSTrument:MEASure

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP:AUTO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:OFFSet[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:FULL[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:PREVious[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:HALF[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:DOUBle[:SENSe]:FREQuency:TUNE:IMMediate:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X[:SCALe]:SPACing:CALCulate:MARKer:TRCKing[:STATe]BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution]:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:AUTO[:SENSe]:BWIDth:VIDeo:RATio[:SENSe]:FILTer:TYPE

Sweep[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:INITiate:CONTinuous:INITiate[:IMMediate][:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE[:SENSe]:SWEep:MODE:AUTO[:SENSe]:SWEep:TYPE:AUTO:RULes[:SENSe]:SWEep:SPEed[:SENSe]:SWEep:POINts

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:SPACing:UNIT:POWer:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:SCALe:RLEVel:OFFSet[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]

Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:LEVel

www.siglent.com

211

SHA850A User Manual:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:EXTernal:DELay:COMPensation:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:SOURce[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe[:STATe][:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:DELay[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:LENGth[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:METHod[:SENSe]:SWEep:EGATe:VIEW:STARt

212

Trace

TRACe:SELEct:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DISPlay[:STATe]:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6 [:DATA]?
:FORMat[:TRACe][:DATA][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6[:FUNCtion][:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AUTO[:SENSe]:DETector:TRACe:AUTO:ALL:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:Y:CALCulate[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:OFFSet:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MATH:REFerence:CALCulate:NTData:STORE:REF:CALCulate:NTData[:STATe]:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRLevel:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:NRPosition:DISPlay:WINDow:NTTRace[:STATe]:TRACe:COPY:TRACe:EXCHange:TRACe:PRESet:ALL:TRACe:CLEar:ALL

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:REFerence:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer:TABLe:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READoutwww.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:READout:AUTO:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:LINE:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FUNCtion:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:NDB?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:FCOunt:X?
:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STEP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:RLEVel:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:NEXT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:LEFT:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:RIGHt:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:PTPeak:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:EXCursion:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:CALCulate:PEAK:TABLe?
:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:SORT:ORDER:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:PEAK:TABLe:DTLimit |1|2|3|4|5|6
Limit

www.siglent.com:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:MARGin:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:X:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:Offset:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:POINt:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:ALL:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:TRACe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FREQuency:CMODe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:INTerpolate:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:AMPLitude:CMODe213

SHA850A User Manual:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COPY:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:BUILd:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?

214

Settings[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:COUNt[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6?
[:SENSe]:AVERage:TRACe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:CLEar[:SENSe]:AVERage:TYPE:COUPle:ALL:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:STATe?
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:Y:DLINe:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe:STATe?
:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:X:FLINe[:SENSe]:DEMod[:SENSe]:DEMod:EPHone[:SENSe]:DEMod:VOLume[:SENSe]:DEMod:TIME:INSTrument:COUPle:FREQuency:CENTer

Chp[:SENSe]:CHPower:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?
[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol[:SENSe]:CHPower:FREQuency:SPAN:POWer:UNIT:CHPower:POWer:PSD:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:CHPower?
:CHPower:MEASure:CHPower:DENSity?
[:SENSe]:CHPower:AVERage:TCONtrol

ACPR[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:BWIDth:INTegration[:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet:BWIDth[:INTegration][:SENSe]:ACPRatio:OFFSet[:FREQuency]:MEASure:ACPRatio:ACPower:MAIN?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer:POWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:LOWer?
:MEASure:ACPRatio:UPPer?
[:SENSe]:ACPower:AVERage:TCONtrol

OBW[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PERCent[:SENSe]:OBWidth:XDB:MEASure:OBWidth?
:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth?

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual:MEASure:OBWidth:CENTroid?
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:PREFerence[:SENSe]:OBWidth:INTegration[:METHod]:MEASure:OBWidth:OBWidth:FERRor?
[:SENSe]:OBWidth:AVERage:TCONtrol
T-Power[:SENSe]:TPOWer:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:TPOWer:LLIMit[:SENSe]:TPOWer:RLIMit:MEASure:TPOWer?
[:SENSe]:TPOWer:AVERage:TCONtrol

TOI:MEASure:TOI?
:MEASure:TOI:IP3?
[:SENSe]:TOI:AVERage:TCONtrol

Sepctrum
Monitor[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:STATe[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:RESTart[:SENSe]:SPECtrogram:AVERage:TCONtrol

CNR[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:INTegration[:SENSe]:CNRatio:BANDwidth:NOISe[:SENSe]:CNRatio:OFFSet:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:CARRier?
:CNRatio:MEASure:CNRatio:NOISe?
[:SENSe]: CNRatio:AVERage:TCONtrol

Harmonics[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:FUNDamental:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:HARMonics:FREQuency:STEP[:INCRement]:AUTO[:SENSe]:HARMonics:NUMBer[:SENSe]:HARMonics:SELect

10.6.2

VNA

Freq:FREQuency:STARt:FREQuency:CENTer:FREQuency:STOP[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO[:SENSe#]:FREQuency:SPAN:SWEPT[:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN:ZERO?

Sweep[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:INITiate:CONTinuous:INITiate[:IMMediate]www.siglent.com

215

SHA850A User Manual

216

Ampt

:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

Trace:CALCulate#:PARameter:COUNt:CALCulate#:PARameter:SELect:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:MEMorize:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MEMory[:STATe]:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:HOLD

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:NDB:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:BANDwidth:RESult?
:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DISCrete:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch [:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:CENTer:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:START:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8[:SET]:STOP:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:DELTa[:SET]:SPAN

Limit:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:STATe:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:ALL:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOP

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Meas:CALCulate#:PARameter#:DEFine:CALCulate#[:SELected]:FORMat:CORRection:EXTension:CORRection:EXTension:PORT[1]|2:TIME:CORRection:EXTension:AUTO:PORT:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX:SOURce#:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]

Cal:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:THRU:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:ECAL?
:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:CANCEL

www.siglent.com

217

SHA850A User Manual

10.6.3

218

CAT

Freq

[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STARt[:SENSe]:FREQuency:STOP

BW[:SENSe#]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe#]:AVERage:COUNt

Ampt:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:Y[:SCALe]:AUTO

Sweep:SWEep:POINts[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME[:SENSe]:SWEep:TIME:AUTO:INITiate:CONTinuous:INITiate[:IMMediate]

Trace:CALCulate#:PARameter:SELect:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe[1]|2|:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow#:TRACe#:MEMory[:STATe]:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:MEMorize:CALCulate#[:SELected]:MATH:FUNCtion

Marker:CALCulate:MARKer:SELEct:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:TRACe:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MODE:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:STATe:CALCulate:MARKer:AOFF:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:X:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:Y?
:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MAXimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:MINimum:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CPSearch[:STATe]:CALCulate:MARKer[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7|8:CVSearch[:STATe]

Limit:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:MODE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:Y:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DATA:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:ADD:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|:TYPE:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:DELete:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2:ALL:DELete

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual:CALCulate:LLINe:TEST:CALCulate:LLINe[1]|2|3|4|5|6:FAIL?
:CALCulate:LLINe:CONTrol:BEEP:CALCulate:LLINe:FAIL:STOPCal:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:LABel:CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:GENDer:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:TYPE:CORRection:COLLect:OPEN:CORRection:COLLect:SHORt:CORRection:COLLect:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:THRU:CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:ECAL?
:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:MODULE:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:LOAD:CORRection:COLLect:ECAL:CANCEL

Meas:CALCulate[:SELected]:DTF:FORMat
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STARt
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:STOP[:SENSe#]:CORRection:RVELocity:COAX:CORRection:LOSS:COAX
CALCulate:DTF:TRANsform:WINDow
CALCulate:TRANsform:DISTance:UNIT:CALCulate[:SELected]:TDR:FORMat
CALCulate:TDR:STIMulus:TYPE
CALCulate:TDR:WINDow:beta

www.siglent.com

219

SHA850A User Manual

10.6.4

220

MA

DMA

[:SENSe]:AVERage[:STATe][:SENSe]:AVERage:COUNt[:SENSe]:DDEMod:MODulation:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SRATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:SYMBol:POINts[:SENSe]:DDEMod[:FORMat]:RLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer[:MEASurement][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FILTer:REFerence[:SENSe]:STATistic:STATe:CALCulate:RESTart:READ:DDEMod?
[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SLENgth[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:THREshold[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINLength[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:BURSt:MINGap[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd[:STATe][:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:OFFSet[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SYNC:SWORd:PATTern[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:STATe[:SENSe]:DDEMod:SEGMent:BER:PATTern

AMA[:SENSe]:ADEMod:STYLe:CALCulate:IFBW:INDEx:CALCulate:EQLPf:INDEx:READ:ADEMod?

Freq[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer[:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:STEP[:INCRement][:SENSe]:FREQuency:SPAN?

BW[:SENSe]:BWIDth[:RESolution][:SENSe]:DDEMod:FFT:WINDow:TYPE

Sweep:INITiate[:IMMediate]:INITiate:CONTinuous

Trigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:LEVel:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:DELay:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:{type}:SLOPe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:PERiod:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:OFFSet:DISPlay:RESet:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:FRAMe:SYNC:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:ATRigger:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:STATe:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual:TRIGger[:SEQuence]:HOLDoff:TYPE
Ampt[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:AUTO:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel:TRACe1|2|3|4:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision:TRACe1|2|3|4[:Y]:AUToscale[:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe]

Trace:CALCulate:PARameter:COUNt:DISPlay:LAYout:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:DATA:NAME:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:FORMat[:Y]:TRACe:DEMod:EYE:LENGth:TRACe:DEMod:TABLe:FORMat

Marker:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:ENABle:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:TYPE:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:X:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:Y?
:TRACe[1]|2|3|4:MARKer[1]|2|3|4:REFerence:CALCulate[:SELected]:MARKer:COUPle

www.siglent.com

221

SHA850A User Manual

10.6.5

222

Other

IO

[:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce:TYPE[:SENSe]:CORRection:IMPedance[:INPut][:MAGNitude]

Correction[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#[:STATe][:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:ADD[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DATA?
[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET#:DELete[:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete

System:SYSTem:CONFigure:SYSTem?
:SYSTem:LANGuage:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:TYPE:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPADdress:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:GATeway:SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:SMASk:SYSTem:WEB:PSW:SYSTem:TIME:SYSTem:DATE:SYSTem:LKEY:SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB:ADDRess

Reset:SYSTem:PRESet:SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7:SAVE:SYSTem:PRESet:USER[1]|2|3|4|5|6|7:LOAD:SYSTem:PON:TYPE:SYSTem:FDEFault:SYSTem:CLEAr

Calibration:CALibration:STATe:CALibration

File:MMEMory:STORe:MMEMory:LOAD:MMEMory:DELete

Display:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:GRATicule:GRID:BRIGhtness:DISPlay:WINDow:TRACe:SCREen:BRIGhtness

Power:SYSTem:POWer:OFF:SYSTem:RESTart

Buzzer:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:STATe:DISPlay:WINDow:BEEP:VOLUme

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

11 Service and Support
11.1 Service Summary
SIGLENT warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects inmaterials and workmanship for a period of three years (accessories for a period of one year) from thedate of shipment from an authorized Siglent distributor. If the product proves defective within therespective period, SIGLENT will provide repair or replacement as described in the complete warranty
statement.
To arrange for service or obtain a copy of the complete warranty statement, please contact yournearest Siglent sales and service office. Except as provided in this summary or the applicablewarranty statement, SIGLENT makes no warranty of any kind, express or implied, including without
limitation the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event
shall SIGLENT be liable for indirect, special or consequential damages.

11.2 Troubleshooting
Before calling SIGLENT, or returning an analyzer for service, perform the quick checks listed below.
This check may eliminate the problem.
If the problem remains still, please contact SIGLENT and provide your device information in the backof the analyzer.
1

2

The Power Switch

is still dark after power on:

1)

Check that the power is correct / working.

2)

Check the power cord has been connected correctly

3)

Check the power fuse. If a new fuse needs to be installed, please use a specified fuse.

The analyzer’s screen is still dark (no display) after power on:
1)

Check whether the fan is running while the screen is dark, maybe the LCD cable is loose?

2)

Check whether the fan is not running while screen is dark, maybe it has failed to start up?

Do not disassemble the instrument by yourself and contact SIGLENT.

3

The control panel is unresponsive or gives a wrong response:
1)

Press all the keys at the front panel to check if all of them are normal after power on.

2)

Press

3)

If all the keys are not working, the numeric keyboard connection might be loose or thenumeric keyboard is broken.

4)

If the touch screen is not working, check if the Touch is ON in
Settings menu.

www.siglent.com

System> Self Test > Key Test to check if all the keys are working properly.

Display > Touch223

SHA850A User Manual

5)

Check whether the analyzer is locked in a remote control; if so, press

Esc to unlock it.

Do not disassemble the instrument by yourself and contact SIGLENT.

4

5The traces on the screen do not update for a long period of time:
1)

Check whether the traces are in View or other status; if so, change to Clear&Write toactiviate it.

2)

Verify whether all the trigger conditions have been met and whether there is a valid trigger
signal inputting.

3)

Check whether the analyzer is in a Limit test.

4)

Check whether the analyzer is in a single sweep.

5)

Check whether the current sweep time is too long.

6)

Check whether the analyzer is in a Demod listening and the Demod time is too long.

7)

Check whether the analyzer is in an EMI measurement mode, and the Sequance is not in a
Scan status.

Wrong measurement results or poor precision:
To calculate the system errors and check the measurement results and precision, refer to theintroductions in “Specifications”. To reach these specifications, please:1)

Check whether all the external devices are successfully connected and are working normally.

2)

Get some knowledge of the signal under measurement and set appropriate instrument
parameters.

3)

Make measurements under proper conditions, for example:
Warm-up the instrument appropriately and operate the instrument under the specified
environment temperature;
Check if the Correction is ON in SA or VNA mode.

6

4)

Calibrate the instrument regularly to reduce or avoid errors that might occur over time.

5)

If you need a specific calibration after the stated calibration period, contact SIGLENT or get
paid service from authorized measurement agencies.

System Message:
The instrument may display prompt messages, error messages or state messages according to
the current working status. These messages are displayed to help you to use the instrument
correctly and are not instrument failures.

224

www.siglent.com

SHA850A User Manual

Table 11-1 System Message
User system message

Message on screen

System message description (1~199)
SWT_OOR (1)Sweep time out of range

RBW_OOR(2)RBW out of range

SWT_CCOFM(3)Can't change the sweep time in FFT mode

MRKT_UNDEF(4)Undefined marker type

MRKFT_UNDEF (5)Undefined marker function type

MRKDT_UNDEF (6)Undefined marker delta pair type

MRKRT_UNDEF (7)Undefined marker read out type

TRCT_UNDEF (8)Undefined trace type

DETT_UNDEF (9)Undefined detect type

SCA_CSWL (10)Can't set the Scale/Div with linear

MRKT_IOFF (11)The marker type is OFF, please open the current marker

MRK_NDELT (12)The marker type is not Delta

MRKRT_MBST (13)The marker read out type must be set time

MATHT_UNDEF (14)Undefined math type

XML_ANIE (15)Xml attribute node import error

XSCA_MBSLIZS (16)

X Scale must be set liner in zero span

TG_AXIS_XSCA (17)The Scale type must be logarithm when normalize

SCALE_TG_AXIS (18)

Scale type cannot be changed to linear while nomalize on

PEAK_UNFOUND (19)No peak found. Please change the search setting

IMD_FREQ_OOR (20)Frequency of intermodulation products out of range

AUTO_FAIL (21)Auto tune process failed

EXT_REF_PLUG_IN (22)

EXT ref plug in

EXT_REF_PLUG_OUT (23)

EXT ref plug out

REF_PLL_UNLOCK (24)

Ref pll unlock

SIG_NOT_STB (25)Signal is not stable enough to track

QP_RBW_OOR (26)

RBW out of range when do quasi peak scan

LAN_PLUG_IN (150)

Ethernet cable plug in

LAN_PLUG_OUT (151)

Ethernet cable plug out

IP_CONFLICT (152)

IP address conflict

IP_INVALID (153)

IP address invalid

NETM_INVALID (154)

Netmask address invalid

GWAY_INVALID (155)

Gateway address invalid

S21_NORMALIZE_DONE(183)

Normalization of S21 done

VNA_AUTO_CAL_DONE(184)

Auto calibration of VNA done

Execution error (400~599)

www.siglent.com

225

SHA850A User Manual

LCF_DTFERR (400)

Load configurations failed, due to file error

Device error (600~799)

226

FUF_DTVERR (600)Firmware upgrade failed, due to the version error

FUF_DTRERR (601)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to the ram error

FUF_DTFERR (602)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to the file error

FUF_DTFVERR (603)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to verify the file error

FUF_DTUZFERR (604)

Firmware upgrade failed, due to unzip the file error

LIC_INVALID (605)

License is invalid!

ADC_ERROR (606)

Warning, ADC Overload!

www.siglent.com

About SIGLENTSIGLENT is an international high-tech company, concentrating on R&D,
sales, production and services of electronic test & measurement instruments.
SIGLENT first began developing digital spectrum & network analyzers
independently in 2002. After more than a decade of continuous development,
SIGLENT has extended its product line to include digital spectrum & network

analyzers, isolated handheld spectrum & network analyzers, function/arbitrary
waveform generators, RF/MW signal generators, spectrum analyzers, vector
network analyzers, digital multimeters, DC power supplies, electronic loads
and other general purpose test instrumentation. Since its first spectrum &network analyzer was launched in 2005, SIGLENT has become the fastest
growing manufacturer of digital spectrum & network analyzers. We firmly
believe that today SIGLENT is the best value in electronic test &measurement.

Headquarters:
SIGLENT Technologies Co., Ltd
Add: Bldg No.4 & No.5, Antongda Industrial
Zone, 3rd Liuxian Road, Bao'an District,
Shenzhen, 518101, China
Tel: + 86 755 3688 7876
Fax: + 86 755 3359 1582
Email: sales@siglent.com
Website: int.siglent.com

North America:
SIGLENT Technologies America, Inc

6557 Cochran Rd Solon, Ohio 44139
Tel: 440-398-5800
Toll Free: 877-515-5551
Fax: 440-399-1211
Email: info@siglentna.com
Website: www.siglentna.com

Europe:SIGLENT Technologies Germany GmbH
Add: Staetzlinger Str.

70

86165 Augsburg, Germany
Tel: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 0

Fax: +49(0)-821-666 0 111 22
Email: info-eu@siglent.com
Website: www.siglenteu.com

Follow us on
Facebook: SiglentTech